TM-9-2330-202-14-P ΤΡΕΙΛΕΡ M 101 A3

TM 9-2330-202-14&P
This publication supersedes TM 9-2330-202-14&P dated 7 October 1993.

TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATORS, UNIT, DIRECT SUPPORT, AND
GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL (INCLUDING
REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST)
FOR
TRAILER, CARGO, 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M101 A2 (2330-01-102-4697)
M101 OlA3 (2330-01-372-5641)
TRAILER, CHASSIS, 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M116A2 (2330-01-101-8434)
M116A2E1 (2330-01-333-9773)
TRAILER, CHASSIS, 1-TON, 2-WHEEL
M116A3 (2330-01-359-0080)
INTRODUCTION
1-1
OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS
2-1
OPERATOR/CREW
PMCS
2-3
OPERATOR/CREW
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
3-2
UNIT
PMCS
4-3
UNIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
4-7
DIRECT SUPPORT AND

GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE
5-1
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.
MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART
B-1
REPAIR PARTS AND

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
E-1
LUBRICATION
INSTRUCTIONS
I-1
INDEX
INDEX-1
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

MAY 1997
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
FOR INFORMATION ON FIRST AID, REFER TO FM 21-11.
ASBESTOS
DO NOT handle brakeshoes, brakedrums, or other brake components unless the
area has been properly cleaned. Asbestos dust, which can be dangerous if you
touch it or breathe it, may be on these components. Wear an approved filter mask
and gloves. NEVER use compressed air or a dry brush to clean brake components.
Dust may be removed using an industrial-type vacuum cleaner. Clean dust or mud
away from brake components with water and a wet, soft brush or cloth. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious illness or death to personnel.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Do not allow grease to contact brakeshoe linings. Wipe excess lubricant from
the area of brakeshoe linings to prevent grease from soaking the linings.
Brakeshoe linings can absorb grease and oil, causing early glazing of linings and
very poor braking action. If brakeshoe linings become soaked, Unit maintenance
must replace them. Failure to follow this warning may cause brakes to
malfunction, resulting in serious injury or death to personnel or damage to
equipment.
If a brakeshoe lining is replaced, replace all brakeshoe linings on axle. A
combination of old brakeshoes with new brakeshoes will cause uneven braking.
Accidents causing serious injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment
may result.
When performing maintenance on brake system, make sure wheels are chocked
securely. Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to roll, resulting in
serious injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
COMPRESSED AIR
Compressed air used for cleaning or drying purposes, or for clearing restrictions,
should never exceed 30 psi (207 kPa).
Wear protective clothing (e.g.,
goggles/shield, gloves) and use caution, to avoid injury to personnel.
a
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING

All personnel must stand clear of towing vehicle and trailer during coupling and
uncoupling operations. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury
or death to personnel.
If trailer is not coupled to towing vehicle, make sure handbrakes are applied or
wheels are securely chocked. Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to
roll, resulting in serious injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
DRAWBAR
Drawbar is heavy (280 lb [127 kg] loaded tongue weight). Four or more persons are
needed to lift drawbar. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to
personnel.
DRYCLEANING SOLVENT
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is TOXIC and flammable. Wear protective goggles
and gloves; use only in a well-ventilated area; avoid contact with skin, eyes, and
clothes; and DO NOT breathe vapors. Keep away from heat or flame. Never
smoke when using drycleaning solvent; the flashpoint for type I drycleaning
solvent is 100F (38C) and for type II it is 138F (50C). Failure to follow this
warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
If personnel become dizzy while using drycleaning solvent, immediately get fresh
air and medical help. If solvent contacts skin or clothes, flush with cold water. If
solvent contacts eyes, immediately flush them with water and get immediate
medical attention.
When drycleaning solvent is used, notify the local medical authority (preventive
medicine) and environmental coordinator concerning medical surveillance,
respiratory protection, and disposal requirements.
IMPROPER CLEANING AGENTS

Improper cleaning methods and the use of unauthorized cleaning agents can injure
personnel and damage equipment. To prevent this, refer to TM 9-247 for
instructions.
b
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
STEAM
Avoid contact with steam. Steam can cause burns, blindness, and other serious
injuries. Be sure to wear protective apron, gloves, and safety goggles when using
live steam.
RIVETS/DRIVE SCREWS
Wear eye protection when driving heads off rivets or drive screws.
follow this warning may result in eye injury or loss of vision.
Failure to
HEAVY COMPONENTS
Use extreme caution when handling heavy parts. A lifting device is required when
parts weigh over 50 pounds (23 kg) for a single-person lift, over 100 pounds (45 kg)
for a two-person lift, and over 150 pounds (68 kg) for a three-person or more lift.
Keep clear of heavy parts supported only by lifting device. Failure to follow this
warning may cause serious injury or death to personnel.
HOT COMPONENTS
When checking for improperly adjusted brakes or dry wheel bearings, cautiously
feel each wheel hub and brakedrum. Serious burns will result from touching an
overheated wheel hub and brakedrum.
INTERVEHICULAR CABLE
Make sure intervehicular cable is disconnected from towing vehicle before
performing maintenance on electrical system. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electric shock or burns.
REAR STABILIZER
Rear stabilizer must be used if trailer is carrying generator sets. Failure to follow
this warning may cause trailer to tip, resulting in serious injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
Make sure weight of trailer is on front support leg before raising rear stabilizer.
Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to tip, resulting in serious injury
to personnel or damage to equipment.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
TAILGATE (CARGO TRAILER)

Hold tailgate in place before removing straight-headed pins.
properly supported it may fall, resulting in injury to personnel.
If tailgate is not
TIRES
DO NOT break tire bead and split lockring until certain that no air pressure
remains in tire. Failure to follow this warning may cause lockring to fly off,
resulting in serious injury or death to personnel.
An improperly seated lockring may fly off, resulting in serious injury or death to
any person in its path. A bent or twisted lockring may be difficult to install and, if
used, is a safety hazard. Before applying any air pressure to tire, make sure
lockring is seated against rim of wheel in its entirety. DO NOT inflate more than 3
psi (21 kPa). Tap lockring carefully with a mallet to check its seating.
Inflate tire in an inflation safety cage using an extension hose of a least 10 feet (3
m) with an on/off pressure control valve and pressure gage. DO NOT stand on
lockring side of wheel and tire assembly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in severe injury or death to personnel.
CHANGE NO. 1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
C1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 9-2330-202-14&P
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, D.C., 28 May 1999
OPERATORS
UNIT, DIRECT SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL (INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS
AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST)
FOR
TRAILER. CARGO, 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M101A2 (2330-01-102-4697)
M101A3 (2330-01-372-5641)
TRAILER, CHASSIS 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M116A2 (2330-01-101-8434)
M116A2E1 (2330-01-333-9773)
M116A3 (2330-01-359-0080)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P,
12 May 1997, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages.

2. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page.
Remove Pages
4-101 and 4-102
4-119 and 4-120
B-5 and B-6
16-1 through Figure 18
23-1 through BULK-1
I-1 through I-10
3. File this change sheet in front of the publication
Insert Pages
4-101 and 4-102
4-119 and 4-120
B-5 and B-6
16-1 through Figure 18
23-1 through BULK-1
I-1 through 1-10
for reference purpose.
Approvedfor public release;distribution is unlimited
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
DENNIS J. REIMER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
Ajo
46
X4-j
Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army
9911906
DISTRIBUTION:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distributuion number (IDN) 390560, requirements for TM 9-2330-202-14&P
*TM 9-2330-202-14&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 9-2330-202-14&P
HEADQUARTERS
Washington D.C., 12 May 1997
OPERATORS, UNIT, DIRECT SUPPORT, AND GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS
AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST)
FOR
TRAILER, CARGO, 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M101A2 (2330-01-102-4697)
M101 A3 (2330-01-372-5641)
TRAILER, CHASSIS, 3/4-TON, 2-WHEEL
M116A2 (2330-01-101-8434)
M116A2E1 (2330-01-333-9773)
Ml 116A3 (2330-01-359-0080)
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to
improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or DA Form 2028-2, located
in the back of this manual, directly to: Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and
Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-IM-OPIT, Warren, MI 48397-5000. A reply will
be furnished to you.
You may also provide DA Form 2028-2 information to TACOM via datafax or e-mail:
TACOM's fax number is DSN 786-6323 or (810) 574-6323
TACOM's e-mail address is [email protected]
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..........................................................................................................
CHAPTER
Page
vi
INTRODUCTION
Section I.
General Information ...................................................................................
*This publication supersedes TM 9-2330-202-14&P dated 7 October 1993.
i
1-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
CHAPTER
INTRODUCTION (continued)
Page
Section
II.
Equipment Description and Data..................................................................
1-4
Section
III.
Principles of Operation .................................................................................
1-17
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section
I.
Description and Use of Operators Controls and Indicators .........................
2-1
Section
II.
Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)......
2-3
Section
III.
Operation Under Usual Conditions...............................................................
2-11
Section
IV.
Operation Under Unusual Conditions...........................................................
2-26
OPERATOR/CREW MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section
I.
Lubrication Instructions.................................................................................
3-1
Section
II.
Operator/Crew Troubleshooting Procedures ...............................................
3-2
UNIT MAINTENANCE
I.
Repair Parts; Tools; Special Tools; Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic

Equipment (TMDE); and Support Equipment ...............................................
4-1
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
CHAPTER
Section
Section
II.
Service upon Receipt....................................................................................
4-2
Section
III.
Unit Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) .......................
4-3
Section
IV.
Unit Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................
4-7
Section
V.
General Maintenance Instructions................................................................
4-34
Section
VI.
Electrical System Maintenance ....................................................................
4-39
Section
VII. Brake System Maintenance..........................................................................
4-49
Section
VIII. Wheels, Hubs, and Brakedrums Maintenance .............................................
4-83
Section
IX.
Frame and Towing Attachments Maintenance .............................................
4-92
Section
X.
Springs and Shock Absorbers Maintenance ................................................
4-104
Section
XI.
Body Maintenance .......................................................................................
4-110
Section
XII. Accessory Items Maintenance .....................................................................
4-116
Section
XIII. Special Purpose Kits Maintenance ..............................................................
4-119
Section
XIV. Painting and Identification Marking ..............................................................
4-121
Section
XV. Preparation for Storage and Shipment .........................................................

ii
4-122
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER
DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE
Page
Section
I.
Axle Maintenance .........................................................................................
5-1
Section
II.
Brakedrum and Tire Maintenance ................................................................
5-3
Section
III.
Frame Assembly Maintenance .....................................................................
5-6
Section
IV.
Accessory Items Maintenance......................................................................
5-7
APPENDIX
REFERENCES .............................................................................................
A-1
APPENDIX
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
Section
I.
Introduction ...................................................................................................
B-1
Section
II.
Maintenance Allocation Chart for M101 and M116 Series Trailers ..............
B-4
Section
III.
Tool and Test Equipment Requirements ......................................................
B-7
Section
IV.
Remarks .......................................................................................................
B-7
APPENDIX
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS ...........
C-1
APPENDIX D
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Section
I.
Introduction ...................................................................................................
D-1
Section
II.
Additional Authorization List (AAL) ...............................................................
D-2
APPENDIX E
REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
Section
I.
Introduction ...................................................................................................
Section
II.
Repair Parts List
E-1
GROUP 06
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Page
0609
0613
LIGHTS.........................................................................................................
COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT .......................................................
HULL OR CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS ....................................................
CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS (COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT) ...
INTERVEHICULAR CABLE .........................................................................
WIRING HARNESS AND INTERVEHICULAR CABLE ATTACHMENTS....
1-1
1-1
2-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
iii
Illus/
Figure
1
2
3
4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
GROUP 11
REAR AXLE
Page
Illus/
Figure
1100
REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY .............................................................................

REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY ............................................................................
5-1
5-1
GROUP 12
BRAKES
1201
HANDBRAKES.............................................................................................
6-1
CABLE AND CONDUIT ASSEMBLY............................................................
6-1
HANDBRAKE LEVER...................................................................................
7-1
SERVICE BRAKES ......................................................................................
8-1
BRAKE ASSEMBLY .....................................................................................
8-1
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................
9-1
WHEEL CYLINDER......................................................................................
9-1
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY...........................................
10-1
HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES ....................................................................... 11-1
1202
1204
GROUP 13
WHEELS AND TRACKS
1311
WHEEL ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................

WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY ...................................................................
WHEEL AND RUNFLAT ASSEMBLY (M101A3 and M116A3)....................
TIRES, TUBES, AND TIRE CHAINS............................................................
TIRE AND VALVE ........................................................................................
1313
GROUP 15
FRAME, TOWING ATTACHMENTS, DRAWBARS, AND ARTICULATION

SYSTEMS
1501
1503
1507
FRAME ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................
CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY....................................................................
PINTLES AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS ..................................................
DRAWBAR ASSEMBLY AND SAFETY CHAINS.........................................
LANDING GEAR, LEVELING JACKS ..........................................................
FRONT SUPPORT LEG...............................................................................
GROUP 16
SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS
1601
1604
SPRINGS......................................................................................................
SPRING ASSEMBLY....................................................................................
SHOCK ABSORBER EQUIPMENT .............................................................
SHOCK ABSORBER ....................................................................................
12-1
12-1
13-1
14-1
14-1
15-1
15-1
16-1
16-1
17-1
17-1
18-1
18-1
19-1
19-1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
GROUP 18
BODY, CAB, HOOD, AND HULL
1810
CARGO BODY .............................................................................................

CARGO BODY, RACK, AND TAILGATE ASSEMBLY (M101A2 and ..........
M101A3)
BODY, CHASSIS, AND HULL ACCESSORY ITEMS
20-1
20-1
20
CANVAS, RUBBER, OR PLASTIC ITEMS ..................................................

CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLY AND BOWS (M101A2 and M101A3)..........
21-1
21-1
21
GROUP 22
2201
iv
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Page
2202
2210
ACCESSORY ITEMS ...................................................................................

REFLECTOR (M101A2 and M101A3)..........................................................
DATA PLATES AND INSTRUCTION HOLDERS ........................................
DATA PLATES .............................................................................................
GROUP 33
SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS
3307
SPECIAL PURPOSE KITS...........................................................................

REAR STABILIZER KIT ...............................................................................
GROUP 95
GENERAL USE STANDARDIZED PARTS
9501
BULK MATERIAL .........................................................................................

BULK ............................................................................................................
Section
Section
III
IV
BULK-1
BULK-1
BULK
I-1
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
Section
Introduction ...................................................................................................
F-1
Section
II
Expendable and Durable Items List..............................................................
F-2
ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS
Section
Introduction ...................................................................................................
G-1
Section
II
Manufacturing Instructions ...........................................................................
G-3
APPENDIX
TORQUE VALUES FOR THREADED FASTENERS ..................................
H-1
APPENDIX
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................
I-1
INDEX ...............................................................................................................................................
23
24
APPENDIX
22
24-1
24-1
Special Tools List (If Applicable)

Cross-Reference Indexes
PART NUMBER INDEX ...............................................................................
APPENDIX
22-1
22-1
23-1
23-1
Illus/
Figure
INDEX-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SCOPE.
This technical manual provides you with the information you will need to operate and maintain the M101 Series and M116
Series trailers.
The information contained in this manual is presented in five chapters and nine appendixes, one of which is a repair parts
and special tools list (RPSTL). Each chapter is divided into sections covering operating procedures and/or other
information for specific systems or components.
Note that Appendix A of this manual gives the full title of every manual, form, pamphlet, or other document referenced in
this manual.
INDEXING.
Four indexing procedures are used to help you locate information quickly:
Cover index. Lists chapter titles and important parts of the manual, with corresponding
page numbers. Each chapter or part listed is boxed in, with a black outer edge that is in
line with the first page of that chapter or part.
Table of contents. The table of contents, which follows the summary of warnings, lists
all chapters and sections numerically, with corresponding page numbers.
Section indexes. Each section starts with a numerical listing of all paragraphs in that
section.
Alphabetical index. The alphabetically arranged subject index starts on page Index-1.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES.
You must read and understand this manual BEFORE operating the M101 Series and M116 Series trailers.
Throughout this manual you will see WARNING, CAUTION, and NOTE headings. There are good reasons for every one
of these notices.
A WARNING is used to alert the user to hazardous operating and maintenance

procedures, practices, or conditions that could result in injury or death.
WARNINGs must be strictly observed.
CAUTION
A CAUTION is used to alert the user to hazardous operating and maintenance
procedures, practices, or conditions that could result in damage to, or destruction
of, equipment or mission effectiveness. Captions must be strictly observed.
vi
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES (continued).
NOTE
A NOTE highlights an essential operating or maintenance procedure, condition, or
statement.
WARNINGs and CAUTIONs appear immediately preceding the step to which they pertain. It is important to read and
thoroughly understand the WARNINGs and/or CAUTIONs before beginning maintenance.
NOTES may precede or follow the steps to which they pertain, depending on what makes the most sense.
vii/(viii blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Section I. GENERAL INFORMATION
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
Scope....................................................................................................................
Maintenance Forms, Records, and Reports .........................................................
Destruction of Army Materiel To Prevent Enemy Use ..........................................
Preparation for Storage or Shipment ....................................................................
Quality Assurance.................................................................................................
Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIRs)............................
List of Abbreviations and Acronyms......................................................................
Warranty Information ............................................................................................
Safety, Care, and Handling...................................................................................
Corrosion Prevention and Control.........................................................................
Page
Number
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-1.
SCOPE.
a.
This manual describes Operators, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support maintenance and contains the repair
parts and special tools list for the following:
Trailer, Cargo: 3/4-Ton, 2-Wheel, M101A2 and M101A3;
Trailer, Chassis: 3/4-Ton, 2-Wheel, M116A2 and M116A2E1; and
Trailer, Chassis: 1-Ton, 2-Wheel, M116A3.
b.
All M101 Series cargo trailers use the M116 Series chassis.
c.
Throughout this manual, the terms "curb side" and "road side" are used to describe views of the trailer. As viewed
from the rear, curb side is the right side and road side is the left side.
d.
The trailers are used to carry payloads over highway or cross-country.
1-2.
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS.
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA Pam 738750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS).
1-3.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE.
Refer to TM 750-244-6 for procedures on the destruction of military vehicles to prevent enemy use.
1-4.
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT.
For information on preparing the trailers for storage or shipment, refer to Chapter 4, Section XV.
1-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-5.
QUALITY ASSURANCE.
a.
No specific quality assurance manual pertains to the M101 or M116 Series of trailers.
b.
Defective material received through the supply system should be reported on an SF Form 368 (Product Quality
Deficiency Report). Instructions for preparing the reports are provided in AR 702-7, Reporting of Product Quality
Deficiencies Across Component Lines. Mail your completed form directly to:
Commander
U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command
ATTN: AMSTA-TR-E/MPA
Warren, Ml 48397-5000
1-6.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIRS).
If your trailer needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you
dont like about the equipment. Let us know why you dont like the design or performance. Put it on an SF Form 368 and
mail it to:
Commander
U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command
ATTN: AMSTA-TR-E/MPA
Warren, MI 48397-5000
1-7.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS.
AAL
BII
BOI
CAGEC
CARC
COEI
CPC
services
CTA
CUCV
DA
DoD
E
EIR
GAA
hr
HMMWV
System
IAW
JTA
kph
L
equipment
LED
MAC
MOS
MTOE
MWO
NBC
additional authorization list

basic issue items
basic
commercial and government entity code
chemical agent resistant coating
components of end item
corrosion prevent and control
NIIN
Nm
NSN
OC
p.
para
PMCS
national item identification number

newton meter
national stock number
on condition
Page
paragraph
preventive maintenance checks and
Common Table of Allowances

commercial utility cargo vehicle
Department of Army
Department of Defense
empty
equipment improvement recommendation
grease, automotive and artillery
hour
high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle
qty.
Qty. Recm.
Qty. Rqr.
RPSTL
SMR
SN
SOP
SRA
TAMMS
quantity
quantity recommended
quantity required
repair parts and special tools list
source, maintenance, and recoverability
serial number
standard operating procedure
specialized repair activity
The Army Maintenance Management
in accordance with
Joint Table of Allowances
kilometers per hour
liter
TB
TDA
TM
TMDE
technical bulletin
Table of Distribution and Allowances
technical manual
test,
measurement,
and
diagnostic
light-emitting diode
maintenance allocation chart
military occupational specialty
Modified Table of Organization and Equipment
modification work order
nuclear biological and chemical
TOE
U/M
UOC
V dc
W/
W/O
Table of Organization and Equipment

unit of measure
usable-on code
volts, direct current
with
without
1-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-8.
WARRANTY INFORMATION.
The M101 and M1 6 Series trailers are not warranted.

1-9.
SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING.
For information on general safety precautions and regulations, review the warning summary at the front of this manual
preceding the table of contents. Observe all WARNINGs and CAUTIONs that appear in the maintenance procedures.
1-10.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL.
a.
Corrosion prevention and control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any
corrosion problem with this item be reported so the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to
prevent the problem in future items.
b.
While corrosion is typically associated with the rusting of metals, it can also include deterioration of other
materials, such as rubber and plastic. Unusual cracking, softening, swelling, or breaking of these materials may
be a corrosion problem.
c.
If a corrosion problem is identified, it can be reported using an SF Form 368. The use of key words, such as
"corrosion," "rust," "deterioration," and "cracking," will ensure that the information is identified as a CPC problem.
The form should be submitted to the address specified in DA Pam 738-750.
1-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA
Paragraph
Number
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
Paragraph Title
Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features ........................................
Location and Description of Major Components...................................................
Location and Contents of Data Plates ..................................................................
Differences Between Models ................................................................................
Equipment Data ....................................................................................................
Page
Number
1-4
1-5
1-10
1-12
1-14
1-11.
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES.
a.
CHARACTERISTICS
1.
All trailers are designed to be towed by a towing vehicle without airbrake connections. A handbrake lever and
cable assembly located on each side of the trailer activates a handbrake at each wheel. Control of each
handbrake is independent.
2.
In addition to handbrake lever-activated handbrakes, the trailers are equipped with an inertia-actuated hydraulic
brake system. For principles of operation of this system, refer to Section III of this chapter.
3.
All trailers have a single axle with two wheels.
4.
The trailer suspension consists of two leaf spring assemblies and shock absorbers.
5.
The M116A2E1 and M1 16A3 are equipped with a dropped axle, frame, and spring assemblies that allow for a
greater payload than the other models.
6.
The cargo body, which is a feature of M101 Series trailers, can be easily removed. The old-style cargo body is
being phased out. The new-style cargo body adds reinforcements and U-bolt lift points to ensure that the cargo
body can be lifted without danger and without using spreader bars.
.A rear stabilizer may be added to provide greater stability when the trailer is carrying generator sets. Use of the
stabilizer is optional for all other applications.
b.
CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES
1.
Maximum towing speeds with maximum payload evenly distributed are: highway, 50 miles per hour (80 kph); and
cross-country, 6 miles per hour (10 kph).
2.
Maximum payload varies with model designation. Refer to paragraph 1-15.
3.
The cargo capacity of the M101 Series trailers may be increased by installing a rack and tailgate assembly. A
canvas cover assembly may be used to protect cargo from the weather.
1-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS.
Key
Component
Description
Drawbar Coupler
Couples trailer to towing vehicle pintle.
Breakaway Chain
Provides for emergency braking of trailer. Attaches to

towing vehicle and applies brakes in the event trailer
breaks away from towing vehicle.
Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly
Transmits braking forces from towing vehicle to trailer

and service brakes by means of a drawbar coupler,
master cylinder, hydraulic brake tubes and hose, and
wheel cylinders.
Intervehicular Cable
Provides electrical connection between trailer and

towing vehicle.
Composite Light
Indicates trailer presence to vehicles traveling behind.

Consists of blackout light, service light, turn signal,
and stoplight. Located at each side of trailer rear.
Tiedown Shackles
Secures trailer during shipment. Located at each front

and rear corner of chassis.
Chassis
Provides mounting for cargo body of M101 Series

trailers. Frame assembly common to all models.
1-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-12.
LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS (continued).
Key
Component
Description
Axle
Carries wheels and allows wheels to rotate. Tubular

weldment on which trailer wheels and suspension
components are mounted.
Shock Absorber
Dampens spring action. Located on each end of axle.
10
Wheel and Tire Assembly
Supports trailer load. Attached to each end of axle.
11
Spring Assembly
Supports trailer load and absorbs road shock. Located

on each side of frame.
12
Handbrake Lever
Applies handbrake when trailer is stopped or parked.

Located on each side of chassis.
13
Front Support Leg
Supports trailer when uncoupled from towing vehicle.

All trailers have an adjustable front support leg.
14
Safety Chain
Prevents trailer from fully breaking away. Hooks to

towing vehicle shackles. Located on each side of
drawbar assembly.
1-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-12.
Key
Component
Description
15
U-bolt (M101 A2 and M 101A3)
Provides lift points for new-style cargo body. Located

at each of four lower corners of cargo body.
16
Cargo Body (M101A2 and M101A3)
Carries cargo. A welded box assembly attached to

frame.
17
Reflector (M101A2 and M101A3)
Indicates trailer presence to vehicles traveling behind.

Located at lower corners of all sides of cargo body.
18
Rear Stabilizer
Prevents trailer from tipping over when loading and

unloading cargo. Required when trailer is carrying
generator sets.
1-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-12.
Key
Component
Description
19
Canvas Cover Assembly

(M101A2 and M101A3)
Protects cargo from weather.
20
Rack Assembly
(M101A2 and M101A3)
Increases cargo volume capacity. Consists of one

front rack assembly, two side rack assemblies, and a
two-section tailgate assembly. Earlier-model rack
assemblies are wooden. Newer-model rack assemblies
are made of composite material.
21
Tailgate Assembly
(M101A2 and M101A3)
Opens outward from center for ease in loading and

unloading cargo. This two-section hinged tailgate
assembly is a component of the rack assembly. Earliermodel tailgate assemblies are wooden. Newer-model
tailgate assemblies are made of composite material.
22
Tailgate (M101 A2 and M101 A3)
Swings down for ease in loading and unloading cargo.

This one-piece tailgate is secured in position by two
chain and pin assemblies.
1-8
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-12.
Key
Component
Description
23
Cargo Hook (M101A2 and M101A3)
Secures canvas cover assembly to the cargo body.

Located on all four sides of cargo body (six on front and
rear, eight on left and right sides).
24
Chain and Pin Assembly

(M101A2 and M101A3)
Secures cargo body tailgate in position. Located at

both upper rear corners of cargo body.
25
Bow Clip (M101A2 and M101A3)
Stows bow assemblies. Located on front corner of

each side rack assembly.
26
Bow Assembly (M101A2 and Ml01A3)
Supports canvas cover assembly. Five bow assemblies

fit across rack assembly. Earlier-model bow assemblies
are wooden. Newer-model bow assemblies are made
of steel.
1-9
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-13.
LOCATION AND CONTENTS OF DATA PLATES.
M101A2 and M101A3 Cargo Trailers
1-10
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-13.
LOCATION AND CONTENTS OF DATA PLATES (continued).
M116A2, M116A2E1, and M116A3 Chassis Trailers
1-11
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-14.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS.
a.
GENERAL
1.
Differences between trailers consist of configuration variations in the electrical system, axle, brakes, wheels,
frame, and suspension.
2.
The major trailer differences are summarized In Table 1-1.

Table 1-1. Differences Between Models
Model
Axle
Inertia
Brake
System
M101A2
Straight
Yes
Tubeless/Bias
3 In. (7.62 cm)
M101A3
Offset
Yes
Tubeless/Bias and Runflat/Radial
4 in. (10.16 cm)
M116A2
Straight
Yes
Tubeless/Bias
3 in. (7.62 cm)
M116A2E1
Straight
Yes
Tubeless/Bias
4 in. (10.16 cm)
M116A3
Offset
Yes
Tubeless/Bias and Runflat/Radial
4 in. (10.16 cm)
Wheels/Tires
Frame
Spring
Leaves
b.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1.
Trailers are equipped with a chassis wiring harness (1) that terminates at a covered junction box (2) on the roadside drawbar. The intervehicular cable (3) is fixed to the trailer.
2.
Trailers are equipped with a two-light composite stoplight-taillight configuration that may have standard lamps or
LEDs.
1-12
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-14.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS (continued).
c.
BRAKE SYSTEM
1.
The handbrake levers (4) are located at the front corners of the frame. Adjustment of one of these levers is made
at the lever itself.
2.
The trailers have both handbrakes and an inertia-actuated hydraulic brake system (5) (para 1-16).
d.
AXLE, FRAME, AND SUSPENSION
The Ml 16A2E1 and Ml 16A3 are variants of the Ml 16A2. Heavy-duty axles, four-inch frames, and spring assemblies
allow for a greater payload than the M116A2 (para 1-15). In addition, the M116A3 uses the HMMWV radial runflat wheel
and tire assemblies.
1-13
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-15.
EQUIPMENT DATA.
Components Common to All Models

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .....................................................................................................24 V dc
AXLE ..................................................................................................................................Tubular Weldment
TIRES
Quantity ..............................................................................................................................2
Ply ....................................................................................................................................8
Size ....................................................................................................................................9 x 16 in. (23 x 41 cm)
Inflation Pressure:
M101A3 and M116A3 (Runflat/Radial).......................................................................30 psi (207 kPa)
Bias (All Except M101A3 and M116A3)
Highway......................................................................................................................35 psi (241 kPa)
Sand ...........................................................................................................................30 psi (207 kPa)
WHEELS
Rim Size ............................................................................................................................16 x 6.5 in. (43 x 16 cm)
SUSPENSION
Spring Assemblies..............................................................................................................Semielliptical
Shock Absorbers ................................................................................................................Hydraulic, Double-acting
HANDBRAKES
Actuation.............................................................................................................................Mechanical
Location..............................................................................................................................Front of Frame
Quantity ..............................................................................................................................2
TOWING SPEEDS
Highway .............................................................................................................................50 mph (80 kph)
Cross-country ....................................................................................................................6 mph (10 kph)
M101A2, M101A3, AND M116A2
GENERAL
Angle of Departure .............................................................................................................30
Center of Gravity (Measured from Center of Rear Axle):
Empty..........................................................................................................................45 3/4 in. (116.21 cm)
Loaded........................................................................................................................36 1/4 in. (92.08 cm)
Shipping Volume of Chassis Trailer ...........................................................................213 cu ft (5.96 cu m)
Shipping Volume of Cargo Trailer ..............................................................................520 cu ft (14.56 cu m)
DIMENSIONS
Overall:
Length ........................................................................................................................147 in. (373.38 cm)
Width .........................................................................................................................73.5 In. (186.69 cm)
Height of Chassis .......................................................................................................35 in. (88.9 cm)
Height of Cargo Trailer (M101A2 and M101A3):
Empty..........................................................................................................................83 in. (210.82 cm)
Loaded........................................................................................................................79 In. (200.66 cm)
1-14
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-15.
EQUIPMENT DATA (continued).

Cargo Body (Old Style):
Length.........................................................................................................................76 in. (193.04 cm)
Width ..........................................................................................................................65.5 in. (166.37 cm)
Height .........................................................................................................................18 in. (45.72 cm)
Tread ..........................................................................................................................72 in. (182.88 cm)
Cargo Body (New Style) (M101A2 and M101A3):
Length.........................................................................................................................100 in. (254 cm)
Width ..........................................................................................................................73.5 in. (186.69 cm)
Height .........................................................................................................................19.84 in. (50.39 cm)
TOWING INFORMATION
Towing Attachment ............................................................................................................Drawbar Coupler
Towing Vehicle ...................................................................................................................CUCV Series, HMMWV
Series, 2-1/2 Ton series,
5 Ton series
WEIGHTS
Payload (Maximum):
Cross-country .............................................................................................................1500 lb (681 kg)
Highway .....................................................................................................................2250 lb (1021.5 kg)
Empty:
Wheels .......................................................................................................................1225 lb (556.15 kg)
Front Support Leg.......................................................................................................115 lb (52.21 kg)
Total 1340 lb (608.36 kg)
With Payload:
Wheels
Cross-country.....................................................................................................2640 lb (1198.56 kg)
Highway .............................................................................................................3360 lb (1525.44 kg)
Front Support Leg
Highway .............................................................................................................230 lb (104.42 kg)
Total
Highway ............................................................................................................3590 lb (1629.86 kg)
M116A2E1
GENERAL
Angle of Departure ............................................................................................................30
Center of Gravity:
Empty .........................................................................................................................15.3 in. (38.86 cm)
Loaded........................................................................................................................8.3 in. (21.08 cm)
Shipping Volume of Chassis Trailer .................................................................................189 cu ft (5.29 cu m)
DIMENSIONS
Length
...........................................................................................................................145.7 in. (370.08 cm)
Width
...........................................................................................................................71.3 in. (181.1 cm)
Height of Chassis ...............................................................................................................30 in. (76.2 cm)
Tread
...........................................................................................................................71.3 in. (181.1 cm)
1-15
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-15.
EQUIPMENT DATA (continued).

TOWING INFORMATION
Series, 2-1/2 Ton series,
5 Ton series
WEIGHTS
Payload (Maximum) ...........................................................................................................2380 lb (1080.52 kg)
Empty:
Wheels ......................................................................................................................661 lb (300.09 kg)
Lunette........................................................................................................................119 lb (54.03 kg)
Total ...........................................................................................................................780 lb (354.12 kg)
Loaded:
Wheels .......................................................................................................................2899 lb (1316.15 kg)
Lunette .......................................................................................................................261 lb (118.49 kg)
Total ...........................................................................................................................3160 lb (1434.64 kg)
M116A3
GENERAL
Angle of Departure ............................................................................................................30
Center of Gravity:
Empty..........................................................................................................................16 in. (40.64 cm)
Loaded........................................................................................................................8.2 in. (20.83 cm)
Shipping Volume of Chassis Trailer .................................................................................189 cu ft (5.29 cu m)
DIMENSIONS
Length
...........................................................................................................................145.7 in. (370.08 cm)
Width
...........................................................................................................................81.5 in. (207.01 cm)
Height of Chassis ...............................................................................................................36 in. (91.44 cm)
Tread
...........................................................................................................................81.5 in. (207.01 cm)
TOWING INFORMATION
Series, 2 1/2 ton series,
5 ton series
WEIGHTS
Payload (Maximum) ........................................................................................................... 2360 lb (1071.44 kg)
Empty:
Wheels ......................................................................................................................675 lb (306.45 kg)
Lunette .......................................................................................................................125 lb (56.75 kg)
Total 800 lb (363.2 kg)
Loaded:
Wheels ......................................................................................................................2905 lb (1 318.87 kg)
Lunette .......................................................................................................................255 lb (115.77 kg)
Total ...........................................................................................................................3160 lb (1434.64 kg)
1-16
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section III. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
1-16.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM.
a.
Brakes are applied automatically by the hydraulic brake system when the towing vehicle slows or stops, or when
the trailer breaks away from the towing vehicle.
b.
The major components of the hydraulic brake system and their functions are as follows:
1.
Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly. This assembly transmits the braking forces of the towing vehicle to the
trailer by inertia. It consists of a drawbar coupler, master cylinder, breakaway chain and lever, and leaf
spring.
2.
Drawbar Coupler. The drawbar coupler attaches to the towing vehicle and controls the master cylinder.
When the towing vehicle goes forward, the drawbar coupler is pulled and the brakes are released. When the
towing vehicle slows down, the trailer pushes the drawbar ring into the towing vehicle and applies the brakes.
3.
Master Cylinder. The master cylinder changes the mechanical motion of the drawbar coupler and breakaway
lever into hydraulic pressure. It has a built-in shock absorber to prevent jerky drawbar coupler movement.
The shock absorber prevents hydraulic pressure from building up when the towing vehicle backs up.
4.
Breakaway Chain. The breakaway chain is attached to the towing vehicle. If the trailer breaks away from the
towing vehicle, the breakaway chain will pull up on the breakaway lever and apply the brakes.
1-17
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
1-16.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM (continued).

5.
Breakaway Lever. The breakaway lever is activated by the breakaway chain and controls the master
cylinder. When the breakaway lever is up, the brakes are applied. When the breakaway lever is down, the
drawbar coupler movement controls the master cylinder.
6.
Leaf Spring. The leaf spring holds the breakaway lever up The breakaway lever must be reset any time it has
been pulled up.
7.
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assemblies and Hose Assembly. These components transfer hydraulic pressure from
the master cylinder to the wheel cylinders.
8.
Wheel Cylinders. One wheel cylinder is located at each wheel. The wheel cylinder changes hydraulic
pressure into mechanical motion. When the wheel cylinder is pressurized, it pushes the primary and
secondary brakeshoes against the brakedrum.
9.
Primary Brakeshoe. The primary brakeshoe is pushed against the brakedrum by the wheel cylinder. The
brakedrum pushes the primary brakeshoe down and into the secondary brakeshoe.
10. Secondary Brakeshoe. The secondary brakeshoe provides braking action. It is pushed into the brakedrum
by the primary brakeshoe.
1-18
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATORS CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Paragraph
Number
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
2-1 General .................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-2 Controls and Indicators .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2-1.
GENERAL.
This section shows the location and describes the function of all controls and indicators. Review this section thoroughly
before operating the trailer.
2-2.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.
KEY
CONTROL or INDICATOR
FUNCTION
Handbrake Levers
Apply and release handbrakes
Breakaway Lever
Applies brakes in emergency situations. May be reset to

release brakes
2-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-2.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS (continued).
KEY
3
CONTROL or INDICATOR
Plunger
FUNCTION
Holds or locks adjustable front support leg in raised or
lowered position.
Handcrank
Rotates to adjust height of adjustable front support leg.
Release Handle
Holds or locks rear stabilizer in raised or lowered position.
2-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. OPERATOR/CREW PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
2-3
General .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2-4
Service Intervals ................................................................................................................ 2-3
2-5
Reporting Repairs............................................................................................................... 2-3
2-6
General PMCS Procedures ............................................................................................... 2-4
2-7
Specific PMCS Procedures ............................................................................................... 2-4
2-8
Leakage Definitions ........................................................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-1 Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)
for the M101 and M116 Series Trailers ............................................................................. 2-6
2-3.
GENERAL.
a.
To ensure that the M 101 and M116 Series trailers are ready for operation at all times, they must be inspected on
a regular basis so that defects may be found before they result in serious damage, equipment failure, or injury to
personnel. This section contains systematic instructions on inspections, adjustments, and corrections to be
performed by the operator/crew.
b.
While performing preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), read and follow all safety instructions
found in the warning summary at the beginning of this manual. Keep in mind all WARNINGs and CAUTIONs.
2-4.
SERVICE INTERVALS.
Perform the PMCS procedures listed in Table 2-1 at the following intervals:
2-5.
Perform Before PMCS just before operating the trailer.
Perform During PMCS while operating the trailer.
Perform Weekly PMCS once each week.
Perform Monthly PMCS once each month.
REPORTING REPAIRS.
All defects that the operator cannot fix must be reported on a DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance
Worksheet, immediately after completing PMCS. If a serious problem is found, IMMEDIATELY report it to your supervisor.
2-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-6.
GENERAL PMCS PROCEDURES.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles and gloves,
and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT
breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
a.
Keep equipment clean. Dirt, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem. Clean as you work and as needed.
Use drycleaning solvent (Item 15, Appendix F) on all metal surfaces. Use detergent (Item 5, Appendix F) and
water on rubber, plastic, and painted surfaces.
b.
While performing specific PMCS procedures, inspect the following components:

Bolts, Nuts, and Screws. Make sure they are not loose, missing, bent, or broken. Report loose or missing bolts,
nuts, and screws to Unit maintenance.
Welds. Inspect for gaps where parts are welded together. Check for loose or chipped paint, rust, and cracks.
Report bad welds to Unit maintenance.
Wiring Harness, Wires, and Connectors. Inspect for cracked or broken wiring harness insulation, bare wires,
and loose or broken connectors. Report loose connections and faulty wiring to Unit maintenance.
Hydraulic Brake Lines and Fittings. Inspect for wear, damage, and leaks. Make sure fittings are tight. Report
any damage, leaks, or loose fittings to Unit maintenance.
c.
Check to see that components are adequately lubricated in accordance with Appendix I.
2-7.
SPECIFIC PMCS PROCEDURES.
a.
Operator/Crew PMCS procedures are provided in Table 2-1. Always perform PMCS procedures in the order
listed. Once the procedures become routine, problems can be easily recognized.
b.
Before performing PMCS, read all the checks required for the applicable interval and prepare all the tools needed
for the task. Have several clean rags (Item 13, Appendix F) ready for use. Perform ALL inspections at the
applicable intervals.
c.
If any problems are discovered through PMCS, perform the appropriate troubleshooting task as described in
Chapter 3. If any component or system is not serviceable, or if a given service does not correct the problem,
notify your supervisor.
d.
Explanations of the column headings in Table 2-1 are as follows:

Item No. The item number column of your PMCS table is to be used for reference. When completing DA
Form 2404, include the item number for the check/service indicating a fault. Item numbers also appear In the
order that you must do checks and services for the interval listed.
Interval This column of your PMCS table tells you when to do a certain check or service.
Item To Be Inspected This column names the item to be checked or serviced.
2-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-7.
SPECIFIC PMCS PROCEDURES (continued).

Procedure This column tells you how to do the required checks and services. Follow these instructions
carefully. If tools are not available or if the procedure says to, have Unit maintenance do the work.
NOTE
The term "mission capable" refers to equipment being on hand and able to perform its combat mission
(refer to AR 700-138).
Not Fully Mission Capable If: This column explains when and why your equipment cannot be used.
2-8.
LEAKAGE DEFINITIONS.
a.
It is important to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the trailer. The following are types/classes of
leakage an operator must know to determine if the trailer is mission capable. Learn these leakage definitions.
When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
Class I
Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great enough to form drops.
Class II Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops, but not great enough to cause drops to drip from item
being inspected.
Class III Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from the item being inspected.
CAUTION
Equipment operation is allowable with minor leakages (Class I or II). Of course, you must consider
the fluid capacity in the item/system being checked/inspected. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
When operating with Class I or Class II leaks, continue to check fluid levels as required in your
PMCS.
Class IlI leaks should be reported immediately to your supervisor or Unit maintenance.
b.
Equipment operation is allowed with minor (Class I or II) leakage. Fluid levels in an item/system affected with
such leakage must be checked more frequently than required in PMCS. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
c.
Report Class III leaks IMMEDIATELY to your supervisor or Unit maintenance.

2-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Table 2-1. OPERATOR/CREW PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
FOR THE M101 AND M116 SERIES TRAILERS
Item
No.
Interval
Item to be
inspected
Procedure
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
NOTE
Perform Weekly as well as Before PMCS
if you are the assigned operator but have
not operated the trailer since the last
Weekly PMCS, or if you are operating
the trailer for the first time.
1
Before
Wheel and
Tire Assembly
NOTE
Lug nuts are turned clockwise to
tighten and counterclockwise to
loosen.
a. Check wheels for damage and loose a. One wheel is damaged.
or missing lug nuts.
One lug nut is loose or
missing.
Before
Drawbar
Coupler,
Intervehicular
Cable, and
Safety Chains
b. Check tires for cuts, foreign objects,

or unusual tread wear. Remove any
stones from between treads.
b. One tire is flat, missing,

or unserviceable.
a. Check drawbar coupler (1) for secure

mounting and obvious damage.
a. Drawbar coupler is
loose or bent.
b. Check intervehicular cable (2) for cuts

and breaks.
c. Check safety chains (3) for secure
mounting and obvious damage.
2-6
c. Safety chains are

missing or unsecured.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
FOR THE M101 AND M116 SERIES TRAILERS (continued)
Item
No.
3
Interval
Before
Item to be
inspected
Brake System
Procedure
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
a. Test brake system by coupling trailer

to towing vehicle (para 2-13).
a. Service brakes fail to

operate.
b. Check for brake fluid leakage from

master cylinder, hydraulic brake tube
assemblies, hydraulic brake hose,
and fittings.
b. Any leaks are found.
Before
Handbrakes
With trailer coupled to towing vehicle,

apply handbrakes (para 2-10). Move
trailer slightly to see if handbrakes hold
the wheels.
Before
Canvas Cover
Assembly
(M101A2 and
M101A3)
a. Check for missing or unserviceable

tiedown straps and snap fasteners (1).
b. Check for missing or unserviceable

ropes (2).
c. Check for missing or unserviceable
straps and buckles (3).
d. Check for ripped seams and tears.
2-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Item
No.
6
Interval
Before
Item to be
inspected
Tailgate
Assemby
(M101A2 and
M101A3)
Procedure
a. Check for unserviceable slats (1).
strap hinge assemblies (2).
c. Check for missing or unserviceable
strap latch assemblies (3).
Before
Before
Front Rack
Assembly
(M101A2 and
M101A3)
Bow Assembly
(M101A2
and M101A3)
a. Check for unserviceable slats (1).

strap hinge assemblies (2).
Inspect for unserviceable bow assemblies
(4)
2-8
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Item
No.
9
Interval
Before
Item to be
inspected
Side Rack
Assemby
(M101A2 and
M101A3)
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
Procedure
a. Check for missing or unserviceable
bow clips (1).
b. Check for unserviceable stakes (2).
c. Check for unserviceable slats (3).
d. Check for missing or unserviceable strap
hinge assemblies (4).
10
During
Leg
Front Support
With trailer coupled to towing vehicle,

check front support leg (1) for ease of
operation.
2-9
Front support leg will not

secure in stowed position
or will not support trailer.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Item
No.
11
Interval
During
Item to be
inspected
StoplightTaillights
Procedure
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
NOTE
An assistant is required while checking stoplight-taillights.
a. Connect intervehicular cable to
towing vehicle (para 2-13).
b. Operate towing vehicle light switch
through all settings and check stoplighttaillights.
12
During
Trailer
Operation
a. Be alert for any unusual noise while

towing trailer. Stop and investigate any
unusual noises.
b. Make sure trailer is tracking correctly
behind towing vehicle, with no side pull.
13
Weekly
Wheel and Tire

Assembly
Check for proper tire pressure when tires One tire is flat, missing,
are cool (para 1-15).
or unserviceable.
14
Weekly
Reflectors
On cargo trailers, check for damage and

presence of reflectors.
15
Monthly
Frame
When trailer is loaded, inspect entire

Chassis frame (1) for damage, cracks,
and broken welds.
2-10
Frame is broken or cracked.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
Paragraph
Number
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
Page
Paragraph
General .............................................................................................................................. 2-11
Operating Handbrakes ....................................................................................................... 2-11
Installing Rack, Tailgate, and Canvas Cover Assemblies (M101A2 and M101A3) ........... 2-12
Loading the Trailer.............................................................................................................. 2-15
Coupling Trailer to Towing Vehicle .................................................................................... 2-16
Towing Instructions ............................................................................................................ 2-19
Uncoupling Trailer from Towing Vehicle ............................................................................ 2-21
Removing Canvas Cover, Tailgate, and Rack Assemblies (M101A2 and M101A3) ......... 2-23
2-9.
GENERAL.
a.
This section contains instructions for safely operating the M101 and M116 Series trailers under usual conditions.
Unusual operating conditions are defined and described in Section IV of this chapter.
b.
Before operating a trailer, make sure Unit maintenance services the vehicle.
c.
Perform all Before PMCS listed in Table 2-1 before operating the trailer.
d.
Before coupling and uncoupling the trailer, review all towing instructions in the operators manual for the towing
vehicle.
2-10.
OPERATING HANDBRAKES.
a.
b.
Pull handbrake levers (1) forward and down to apply handbrakes.

Push handbrake levers (1) to an upright position to release handbrakes.
2-11
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-11.
INSTALLING RACK, TAILGATE, AND CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLIES (M101A2 AND MlOlA3).
WARNING
Side rack assembly is heavy and awkward to handle. To prevent injury to personnel, use extreme caution
and get assistance when handling.
NOTE
Two persons are required when performing this task.
a.
Apply handbrakes (para 2-10).
b.
Lift road-side side rack assembly (1) into position

above cargo body (2), with bow clips (3) toward
front of trailer.
c.
Align five stakes (4) with five stake pockets (5) in

cargo body (2). Push stakes (4) evenly into
stake pockets (5) until road-side side rack
assembly (1) is fully installed in cargo body (2).
d.
Repeat steps b and c to install curb-side side

rack assembly (1).
e.
Position front rack assembly (6) between roadside and curb-side side rack assemblies (1).
f.
At road-side corner, align two strap hinge assemblies (7) on front rack assembly (6) with two hinges (8) on roadside side rack assembly (1).
g.
Install two straight headed pins (9), with heads facing up, in two strap hinge assemblies (7) and hinges (8). Install
two cotter pins (10) in straight headed pins (9).
h.
At curb-side corner, repeat steps f and g to install front rack assembly (6) on curb-side side rack assembly (1).
2-12
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-11.
INSTALLING RACK, TAILGATE, AND CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLIES (M101 A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
i.
At rear of trailer, align two strap hinge assemblies (11) on tailgate assembly (12) with two hinges (13) on road- side
side rack assembly (1).
j.
Install two straight headed pins (14), with heads facing up, in two strap hinge assemblies (11) and hinges (13).
Install two cotter pins (15) in two straight-headed pins (14).
k.
At curb side, repeat steps i and j to install curb-side tailgate assembly (16) on curb-side side rack assembly (1).
I.
Close both tailgate assemblies (12 and 16).
m.
Install connecting link (17) in two top strap latch assemblies (18) of both tailgate assemblies (12 and 16).
n.
Install two connecting links (19) in two bottom strap latch assemblies (20) on both tailgate assemblies (12 and 16)
and two holes in cargo body (2).
Align one of five bow assemblies (21) with two

stakes (4) in both side rack assemblies (1)
Push bow assembly (21) evenly into stakes
(4) until fully installed in side rack assemblies
(1).
p.
Repeat step o to install remaining four bow

assemblies (21).
2-13
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-11.
INSTALLING RACK, TAILGATE, AND CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLIES (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
NOTE
Canvas cover assembly should be positioned so that the side marked "FRONT" faces the front of the
trailer.
q.
Spread canvas cover assembly (22) over five bow assemblies (21).
r.
Unfold front curtain (23) and two side curtains (24).
s.
From inside, attach top of canvas cover assembly (22) to five bow assemblies (21) by securing 10 tiedown straps
(25) using 10 snap fasteners (26).
t.
Unfold back curtain (27).
u.
Attach 14 ropes (28) to 14 cargo hooks (29) on cargo body (2). Fasten eight straps (30) on canvas cover
assembly (22).
2-14
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-12.
LOADING THE TRAILER.

WARNING
If trailer is not coupled to towing vehicle, make sure handbrakes are applied and wheels are
chocked securely. Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to roll, resulting in serious
injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
a.
Operate handbrake levers (1) to apply handbrakes (para 2-10).

WARNING
Rear stabilizer must be used if trailer is carrying generator sets. Failure to follow this warning may
cause trailer to tip, resulting in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
b.
If equipped with rear stabilizer (2), pull out on release handle (3) and lower rear stabilizer (2). Turn foot assembly
(4) until it firmly contacts ground.
WARNING
Make sure weight of load is evenly distributed. Too much weight at the front will make trailer difficult to lift.
Too much weight at the rear will cause trailer to tip backward. Serious injury to personnel or damage to
equipment may result.
c.
Distribute load evenly over trailer. Do not exceed maximum allowable payload (para 1-15).
2-15
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-13.
COUPLING TRAILER TO TOWING VEHICLE.

NOTE
Make sure towing vehicle and trailer are on level ground before coupling.
a.

WARNING
Make sure weight of trailer is on front support leg before raising rear stabilizer. Failure to follow this
warning may cause trailer to tip, resulting in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
b.
If equipped with rear stabilizer (1), turn foot assembly (2) as far as it will go into rear stabilizer (1). Swing rear
stabilizer (1) up until latch hook (3) hooks onto up-latch pin (4).
c.
Remove safety pin (5) from pintle hook (6) of towing vehicle.
d.
Pull up on locking latch (7) to open pintle hook (6).
2-16
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-13.
COUPLING TRAILER TO TOWING VEHICLE (continued).

WARNING
All personnel must stand clear of towing vehicle and trailer during coupling operation. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
e.
Back towing vehicle in front of drawbar coupler (8).

WARNING
Drawbar is heavy (280 lb [127 kg] loaded tongue weight). Four or more persons are needed to lift
drawbar. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
f.
Use handcrank to adjust height of drawbar coupler (8). Place drawbar coupler (8) in pintle hook (6).
g.
Close pintle hook (6). Check to see that locking latch (7) is locked by pulling up on pintle hook (6). Pintle hook (6)
should not come up. Install safety pin (5) in pintle hook (6).
h.
Cross two safety chains (9) under drawbar coupler (8) and hook to two towing vehicle eyebolts (10).
2-17
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-13.
i.
Attach breakaway chain (11) to towing vehicle. Make sure there is enough slack in breakaway chain (11) to allow
trailer to make full turns.
CAUTION
Make sure breakaway lever is fully released. If breakaway lever is not fully released trailer brakes will
drag, heat up, and burn out.
j.
Make sure breakaway lever (12) is pushed all the way back toward trailer and that ratchet teeth (13) are not
engaged in leaf spring (14). If ratchet teeth (13) are engaged in leaf spring (14), lift leaf spring (14) and push
breakaway lever (12) all the way back toward trailer.
BRAKES RELEASED
BRAKES APPLIED
k.
Open latch cover (15) of intervehicular cable (16) and push latch (17) to hold latch cover (15) open.
I.
Lift receptacle cover (18) of towing vehicle. Push plug (19) of intervehicular cable (16) all the way into towing
vehicle receptacle (20). Release receptacle cover (18). Make sure tab (21) rests in slot (22).
2-18
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-13.
m.
Pull out on plunger (23) and raise front support leg (24). Lock front support leg (24) in raised position by pushing
in plunger (23) all the way.
n.
Stow handcrank (25) on front support leg (24) with chain and cotter pin (26).
o.
Release handbrakes (para 2-10).
2-14.
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
WARNING
Do not stand between towing vehicle and trailer when backing towing vehicle. Serious injury can result if
personnel are caught between vehicles.
NOTE
Refer to FM 21-305 for further information on proper towing practices.
a.
DRIVING
CAUTION
Sudden stops may cause drawbar to bend or buckle and may cause damage to hydraulic brake actuator
assembly.
1.
When trailer is coupled, always start and stop towing vehicle slowly and gradually. Do this whether or not trailer is
loaded.
2.
Sudden and fast acceleration will cause hydraulic brakes to apply.
3.
Never exceed maximum speed of 50 miles per hour (80 kph) highway and 6 miles per hour (10 kph) crosscountry.
2-19
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-14.
TOWING INSTRUCTIONS (continued).
4.
When diving towing vehicle and trailer, overall length of unit must be kept in mind when turning and passing other
vehicles. Because unit is hinged In the middle, turning and backing are also affected. Heavier payloads will
increase stopping distance and decrease off-road maneuverability.
b.
TURNING
CAUTION
Tight turns may cause damage to hydraulic brake actuator assembly.
1.
When turning corners, allow for the fact that trailer wheels turn inside the turning radius of towing vehicle.
2.
To make a right turn at an intersection, drive towing vehicle partway into intersection, then cut sharply to the night.
This will allow for turning radius of trailer keep trailer wheels off the curb.
c.
BACKING
CAUTION
Jackknifing when backing may cause damage to hydraulic brake actuator assembly.
1.
Always back towing vehicle slowly and gradually.
2.
Whenever possible, have an assistant driver or another person act as a ground guide.
3.
Adjust all towing vehicle rearview mirrors before backing.
4.
When backing, rear of trailer will move in opposite direction in which towing vehicle is turned. When towing
vehicle Is turned to the right, rear of trailer will go left. When towing vehicle has turned and backing in a straight
line is required, turn towing vehicle in direction trailer is moving. This will slowly bring towing vehicle and trailer
Into a straight line.
CAUTION
Sudden stops may cause drawbar to bend or buckle and may cause damage to hydraulic brake
actuator assembly.
d.
STOPPING
Always stop towing vehicle by applying brakes gradually and smoothly. Do this whether or not trailer is loaded.
e.
PARKING
1.
When towing vehicle and trailer are to be left unattended, set towing vehicle parking brakes, turn off engine, and
set wheel chocks.
2.

2-20
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-15.
UNCOUPLING TRAILER FROM TOWING VEHICLE.
a.
b.
Pull out on plunger (1), and lowerfront support leg (2). Lockfront support leg (2) in lowered position by pushing in
plunger (1) all the way.
c.
Lift receptacle cover (3) of towing vehicle from slot (4), and disconnect plug (5) of intervehicular cable (6) from
towing vehicle receptacle (7).
Pull back latch (8). Latch cover (9) of intervehicular cable (6) is spring-loaded to close.
d.
e.
Remove breakaway chain (10) from towing vehicle. Remove two safety chains (11) from two towing vehicle
eyebolts (12).
2-21
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-15.
UNCOUPLING TRAILER FROM TOWING VEHICLE (continued).

WARNING
If load has shifted, make sure it is evenly distributed before removing drawbar coupler from pintle
hook. Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to tip, resulting in injury to personnel or
f.
Remove safety pin (13) from pintle hook (14).
g.
Pull up on locking latch (15) and open pintle hook (14).

WARNING
Drawbar is heavy (280 lb [127 kg] loaded tongue weight). Four or more persons are needed to lift
drawbar. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
h.
Use handcrank to adjust height of drawbar coupler (16). Remove drawbar coupler (16) from pintle hook (14).
I.
Close pintle hook (14). Pull up on pintle hook (14) to ensure that locking latch (15) is engaged. Install safety pin
(13) in pintle hook (14).
j.
Pull out on release handle (17), and lower rear stabilizer (18). Turn foot assembly (19) until it firmly contacts
ground.
2-22
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-16.
REMOVING CANVAS COVER, TAILGATE, AND RACK ASSEMBLIES (M101A2 AND M101A3).
NOTE
Assistance is required for performing this task.
a.
b.
Remove 14 ropes (1) from 14 cargo hooks (2)

on cargo body (3).
c.
Unfasten eight straps (4) on canvas cover

assembly (5).
d.
Fold back curtain (6) over top of canvas cover

assembly (5).
e.
From Inside trailer, unsnap 10 snap fasteners (7)

and remove 10 tiedown straps (8) from five bow
assemblies (9).
f.
Remove canvas cover assembly (5) from five bow

assemblies (9). Fold canvas cover assembly (5) and
stow.
9.
Remove five bow assemblies (9) from 10 stakes

(10).
NOTE
Skip step h if rack and tailgate assemblies are being

removed. Bow assemblies are stowed in bow clips only
if rack and tailgate assemblies are not removed.
h.
Stow five bow assemblies (9) in 10 bow clips

(11).
2-23
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-16.
REMOVING CANVAS COVER, TAILGATE, AND RACK ASSEMBLIES (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
i.
Remove connecting link (12) from two top strap latch assemblies (13) of road-side and curb-side tailgate
assemblies (14 and 15).
j.
Remove two connecting links (16) from two bottom strap latch assemblies (17) and holes in cargo body (3).
k.
At road-side tailgate assembly (14), remove two cotter pins (18) and headed straight pins (19) from two strap
hinge assemblies (20) and hinges (21). Remove road-side tailgate assembly (14) from curb-side tailgate
assembly (15).
I.
At curb side, repeat step k to remove curb-side tailgate assembly (15).
m.
At road-side front rack assembly (22), remove two cotter pins (23) and headed straight pins (24) from two strap
hinge assemblies (25) and hinges (26) on road-side side rack assembly (27).
n.
Repeat step m at curb-side front rack assembly (22).
o.
Remove front rack assembly (22) from road-side and curb-side rack assemblies (27 and 28).
2-24
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-16.
REMOVING CANVAS COVER, TAILGATE, AND RACK ASSEMBLIES (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
WARNING
Side rack assembly is heavy and awkward to handle. To prevent injury to personnel, use extreme caution
and get assistance when handling.
p.
Lift road-side side rack assembly (27) from five stake pockets (29) in cargo body (3).
q.
Repeat step p for curb-side side rack assembly (28).
2-25
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section IV. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
2-17 General 2-26

2-18 Operation in Extreme Cold ......................................................................................................... 2-26
2-19 Operation in Extreme Heat ......................................................................................................... 2-26
2-20 Operation in High Humidity and Saltwater Areas ....................................................................... 2-27
2-21 Operation in Mud and Snow ....................................................................................................... 2-27
2-22 Operation in Dusty or Sandy Areas ............................................................................................ 2-27
2-23 Operation in Rocky Terrain......................................................................................................... 2-27
2-24 At Halt/Parking............................................................................................................................ 2-28
2-25 Fording .................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-17.
GENERAL.
a.
This section contains instructions for safely operating the M101 and M116 Series trailers under unusual
conditions.
b.
In addition to normal preventive maintenance, special care must be taken in regard to cleaning and lubrication to
keep the trailers operational in extreme temperatures and humidity. Proper cleaning, lubrication, storage, and
handling ensure proper operation and function and also guard against excessive wear.
c.
Chronic failure of materiel resulting from exposure to extreme conditions must be reported in accordance with DA
Pam 738-750.
2-18.
OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD.
a.
Refer to the lubrication instructions in Appendix I for proper lubricants to use in extreme cold weather conditions.
b.
Refer to FM 9-207 and FM 21-305 for special instructions on driving hazards that may be encountered during
extreme cold weather conditions.
c.
Extreme cold can cause insulation material on electrical harnesses and wires to crack, causing short circuits.
Other materials can become hard, brittle, and easily damaged or broken.
d.
Make sure tires are properly inflated (para 1-15). Tires may freeze to the ground or have flat spots if underinflated.
e.
Brakeshoes may freeze to the brakedrum and will require preheating to prevent damage (FM 9-207).
2-19.
OPERATION IN EXTREME HEAT.
a.
Refer to Appendix I for proper lubrication during extreme heat conditions. Adequate lubrication is essential.
Extreme heat will cause oil films to evaporate, resulting in inadequate lubrication.
b.
Keep tires covered from direct sunlight to prevent increases in air pressure and deterioration of rubber.
2-26
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-20.
OPERATION IN HIGH HUMIDITY AND SALTWATER AREAS.
a.
Moist and salty areas can destroy the rust preventative qualities of oils and greases. When equipment is active,
exposed surfaces should be cleaned and lubricated daily. Refer to Appendix I for proper lubrication in high
humidity and saltwater areas.
b.
When equipment is inactive, unpainted parts should be coated with grease (Item 7, Appendix F). All covers and
caps should be in place.
2-21.
OPERATION IN MUD AND SNOW.
a.
After operation in mud or snow, have Unit maintenance pack wheel bearings as required (refer to Appendix I).
b.
Refer to FM 21-305 for special instructions on driving hazards in snow. For better traction, reduce air pressure to
25 psi (174 kPa).
c.
If one or more tires sink into mud or snow, it may be necessary to raise the tire and insert planking or matting
beneath it.
d.
Immediately after operation in mud and snow, thoroughly clean, inspect, and lubricate if tactical situation permits.
Refer to Appendix I for proper lubrication instructions.
2-22.
OPERATION IN DUSTY OR SANDY AREAS.
a.
Inspect, clean, and lubricate frequently when operating in sandy or dusty areas. Refer to Appendix I for proper
lubrication instructions.
b.
Make sure no dust or sand enters exposed mechanisms or lubrication fittings during inspections and repair
operations. Cover exposed parts with tarpaulins or other suitable cover during disassembly and assembly.
c.
When beginning operation in dusty or sandy areas, remove lubricants from exposed components, such as landing
gear, if tactical situation permits. Grease and oil will cause dust and sand to accumulate and act as an abrasive,
which will cause rapid wear.
d.
Reduce tire pressure to 30 psi (207 kPa) for emergency use on beach or desert sand. Return tire pressure to
normal after emergency operation (para 1-15).
2-23.
OPERATION IN ROCKY TERRAIN.

Use extreme caution when operating in rocky terrain. Make sure tires are fully inflated to minimize damage to tires
and tubes (para 1-15).
2-27
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
2-24.
AT HALT/PARKING.
a.
For short shutdown periods, park in a sheltered spot out of the wind. For long shutdown periods, prepare a footing
of planks or brush if high, dry ground is not available.
b.
Remove all buildup of ice and snow as soon as possible after shutdown.
c.
Cover trailer with canvas cover assembly or tarpaulin, keeping the ends of the canvas off the ground to prevent
freezing.
2-25.
FORDING.
a.
Refer to operating instructions in towing vehicle technical manual for information about fording operations.
b.
Fording depth of the M101 and M116 Series trailers is limited to 30 inches (76.2 cm).
c.
If tactical situation permits, perform the following services immediately after fording the trailer:
WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles and gloves, and use
only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT breathe vapors.
DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
(1) Notify Unit maintenance to remove wheel and rim assemblies and clean them thoroughly with drycleaning
solvent (Item 15, Appendix F). Dry all working components of handbrakes and wheel bearings. Lubricate
handbrakes and underbody (Appendix I).
(2) Immersion in saltwater greatly increases rusting and corrosion, especially on unpainted surfaces. Remove all
traces of saltwater and salt deposits from all areas of the trailer. Apply grease (Item 7, Appendix F) to exposed
areas of trailer. Notify Unit maintenance that complete disassembly and assembly may be needed.
2-28
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER 3
OPERATOR/CREW MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
3-1.
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS.
Lubrication instructions are in Appendix I of this manual. All lubrication instructions are mandatory.
3-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. OPERATOR/CREW TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Paragraph
Number
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
Paragraph Title
General
Electrical Troubleshooting
Quick Guide to Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Chart
Page
Number
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-2.
GENERAL.
a.
This section provides information for identifying and correcting malfunctions that may develop while operating or
maintaining your trailer.
b.
The Quick Guide to Troubleshooting (para 3-4) lists common symptoms you may find during operation or
maintenance of your trailer or its components, and refers you to the Troubleshooting Chart (para 3-5) for the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures. You should perform the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the
order listed.
c.
If you are unsure of the location of an item mentioned in troubleshooting, refer to paragraph 1-12 or to the
maintenance task where the item is replaced.
d.
Before performing troubleshooting, read and follow all safety instructions found in the warning summary at the
beginning of this manual.
e.
This section cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests or inspections and corrective actions. If a
malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by the corrective actions listed, notify your supervisor or Unit
maintenance.
f.
When troubleshooting a malfunction:
1.
Locate the symptom(s) in the Quick Guide to Troubleshooting (para 3-4) that best describes the malfunction.
2.
Turn to the page in the Troubleshooting Chart (para 3-5) where the troubleshooting procedures for the symptom(s)
in question are described.
3.
Perform each step in the order listed until the malfunction is corrected. DO NOT perform any maintenance task
unless the troubleshooting procedure tells you to do so.
3-3.
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING.
a.
Paragraph 4-31 provides a wiring diagram for troubleshooting the chassis wiring harness.
b.
When troubleshooting any electrical system or component, exercise care in order to prevent electrical shock.
3-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-4.
QUICK GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING.
ITEM
SYMPTOM
PARAGRAPH
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ONE OR BOTH TAILLIGHTS DO NOT WORK.
para 3-5a(1)
BRAKES
BRAKES WILL NOT RELEASE.
para 3-5b(1)
WHEELS AND TIRES
TIRE WEAR IS ABNORMAL OR UNEVEN.
para 3-5c(1)
SUSPENSION
ON SPRING BUMPER.
FRAME HITS SPRING ASSEMBLY OR RESTS
para 3-5d(1)
TRAILER RIDES HARD OR SWAYS.
para 3-5d(2)
3-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-5.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART.
a. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(1) ONE OR BOTH TAILLIGHTS DO NOT WORK.
3-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-5.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (continued).
b. BRAKES
(1) BRAKES WILL NOT RELEASE.
3-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-5.
c.
WHEELS AND TIRES
(1) TIRE WEAR IS ABNORMAL OR UNEVEN.
END OF TASK
3-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-5.
d. SUSPENSION
(1) FRAME HITS SPRING ASSEMBLY OR RESTS ON

SPRING BUMPER.
END OF TASK
3-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
3-5.
d. SUSPENSION
(2) TRAILER RIDES HARD OR SWAYS.
END OF TASK
3-8
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER 4
UNIT MAINTENANCE
Section I. REPAIR PARTS; TOOLS; SPECIAL TOOLS; TEST, MEASUREMENT,
AND DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT (TMDE);
AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
Paragraph
Number
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-1.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Common Tools and Equipment.......................................................................................................... 4-1
Special Tools, TMDE, and Support Equipment.................................................................................. 4-1
Repair Parts ....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
GENERAL.
This chapter describes the Unit maintenance tasks to be performed on the M101 Series and M116 Series trailers.
4-2.
COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.
Common tools and equipment are issued to Unit maintenance personnel for maintaining the M101 Series and M116
Series trailers. Common tools and equipment should not be used for purposes other than those prescribed and should be
properly stored when not in use. For authorized common tools and equipment applicable to your unit, refer to the Modified
Table of Organization and Equipment (MTOE).
4-3.
SPECIAL TOOLS, TMDE, AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT.
No special tools, TMDE, or support equipment is required to maintain the trailers.

4-4.
REPAIR PARTS.
Repair parts are listed and illustrated in Appendix E of this manual.
4-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT

Paragraph
Number
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-5.
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
General............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Inspection Instructions........................................................................................................................ 4-2
Servicing Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
GENERAL.
When a new, used, or reconditioned trailer is received, determine whether it has been properly prepared for service and is
capable of performing Its mission by following the inspection instructions in paragraph 4-6 and the servicing instructions in
paragraph 4-7.
4-6.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS.
a.
Refer to DD Form 1397 for procedures on unpacking the trailer.
b.
Remove all straps, plywood, tape, seals, and wrappings.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear
protective goggles and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated
area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT
c.
Remove rust preventive compound from coated exterior parts of the trailer using drycleaning solvent (Item 15,
Appendix F) and a clean rag (Item 13, Appendix F).
d.
Inspect the trailer for damage incurred during shipment. Check also to see if the equipment has been modified.
e.
Check the equipment against the packing list to see if shipment is complete.
accordance with Instructions in DA Pam 738-750.
4-7.
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS.
a.
Perform all Operator/Crew and Unit preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) listed in Tables 2-1 and
4-1. Schedule the next Unit PMCS on DD Form 314.
b.
Lubricate all lubrication points as described in Appendix I, regardless of interval.
c.
If any system of the trailer does not operate properly, refer to the troubleshooting instructions in Chapter 3, Section
I (Operator/Crew), or Chapter 4, Section IV (Unit).
d.
Perform a break-in road test of 25 miles (40 km) at a maximum speed of 50 miles per hour (80 kph).
e.
Report all problems on DA Form 2407.
4-2
Report any discrepancies in
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section III. UNIT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
Paragraph
Number
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
Table 4-1
4-8.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General............................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Service Intervals................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Reporting Repairs .............................................................................................................................. 4-3
General PMCS Procedures................................................................................................................ 4-3
Specific PMCS Procedures ................................................................................................................ 4-4
Unit Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)
for the M101 and M116 Series Trailers .............................................................................................. 4-5
GENERAL.
To ensure that the M101 Series and M1 16 Series trailers are ready for operation at all times, they must be inspected on a
regular basis so that defects may be detected and corrected before they result in serious damage, equipment failure, or
injury to personnel. Table 4-1 (p. 4-5) contains a tabulated listing of preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS)
to be performed by Unit maintenance personnel.
4-9.
SERVICE INTERVALS.
Perform the PMCS procedures listed in Table 4-1 at the following intervals:
4-10.
Perform Semiannual PMCS procedures once every six months.
Perform Annual PMCS procedures once each year.
REPORTING REPAIRS.
Report all defects and corrective actions on DA Form 2404. If a serious problem is found, report it to your supervisor
immediately.
4-11.
GENERAL PMCS PROCEDURES.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear
protective goggles and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated
area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT
a.
Keep equipment clean. Dirt, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem. Clean as you work and as needed.
Use drycleaning solvent (Item 15, Appendix F) on all metal surfaces. Use detergent (Item 5, Appendix F) and
water on rubber, plastic, and painted surfaces.
b.
While performing PMCS, inspect the following components:
4-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-11.
GENERAL PMCS PROCEDURES (continued).
Bolts, Nuts, and Screws. Make sure they are not loose, missing, bent, or broken. Tighten any that are loose.
Welds. Inspect for gaps where parts are welded together. Report bad welds to your supervisor.
Wiring Harnesses, Wires, and Connectors. Inspect for cracked or broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken
connectors. Repair or replace as necessary.
Hydraulic Brake Lines and Fittings. Inspect for wear, damage, and leaks. Make sure fittings are tight. If a leak
originates from a loose fitting, tighten it. If a component is broken or worn, correct the problem if authorized by the
Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) (Appendix B). If not authorized, report it to your supervisor.
4-12.
SPECIFIC PMCS PROCEDURES.
a.
Unit PMCS procedures are provided in Table 4-1. Always perform PMCS in the order listed. Once PMCS
becomes a routine, problems can be spotted quickly. If anything wrong is discovered through PMCS, perform the
appropriate troubleshooting task listed in Section IV of this chapter. If any component or system is not serviceable
or if the service given does not correct the problem, notify your supervisor.
The PMCS procedures listed in Table 4-1 are to be performed at two intervals: semiannual and annual. Before
performing PMCS, read all the checks required for the applicable interval and prepare the tools needed to make
all checks. Have several clean rags (Item 13, Appendix F) handy. Perform ALL inspections at the applicable
interval.
c.
Explanations of the column headings in Table 4-1 are as follows:
Item No. The Item number column of the PMCS table is used for reference. When completing DA Form 2404, include
the item number for the check/service indicating a fault. Item numbers also appear in the order that you must do checks
and services for the intervals listed.
Interval This column tells you when to do a specific check or service.
Item To Check/Service This column names the item to be checked or serviced.
Procedure This column tells you how to do the required checks and services. Carefully follow these instructions. If you
do not have the tools, or if the procedure tells you to, have Unit maintenance do the work.
Not Fully Mission Capable If: Information in this column tells you what faults will keep the equipment from being capable
of performing its mission. If PMCS reveals faults listed in this column, do not operate the equipment. Follow standard
operating procedures for maintaining the equipment or reporting equipment failures.
4-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Table 4-1. UNIT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) FOR THE M101 AND M116 SERIES
TRAILERS
Item
No.
Interval
Item to
Check/ Service
Procedure
NOTE
Perform Operator/Crew PMCS
prior to or along with Unit PMCS.
Semiannual
Composite
Stoplight-Taillights
Check for broken or cracked lenses or

damaged composite stoplight-taillights
and replace as required (para 4-28).
Semiannual
Intervehicular
Cable
Check for cuts, breaks, frayed wires, or

damaged plug. Replace defective components as required.
Semiannual
Drawbar Coupler
Check for security of mounting. Make sure

drawbar coupler is not excessively worn
at the end.
Semiannual
Safety Chains
Check to make sure safety chains are

there and have no broken links.
Semiannual
Reflectors
(M101A2 and
M101A3)
Check for cracked or broken reflectors and

replace as required (para 4-62).
Semiannual
Front Support Leg
Inspect brackets and front support leg for

bent or broken parts.
Semiannual
Hydraulic Brake
System
Service master cylinder (Appendix I).
Annual
Data Plates
Make sure data plates can be read and

are firmly attached. Replace if damaged or
disfigured (para 4-63).
Annual
Suspension
Assemblies
a. Inspect shackles, bushings, shackle

pins, and spring eyes for damage or broken
parts.
b. Inspect spring assemblies for cracked or
shifted leaves.
c. Inspect spring hangers for obvious
damage.
d. Inspect shock absorbers for damage
and security of mounting.
4-5
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Table 4-1. UNIT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) FOR THE M101 AND M116 SERIES
TRAILERS (continued)
Item
No.
Interval
Item to
Check/ Service
10
Annual
Axle
11
Annual
Wheel and Tire

Assemblies
Procedure
Not Fully Mission

Capable If:
a. Check for damaged axle tube.

b. Check for loose or missing U-bolts or
self-locking nuts.
a. Inspect tires for wear and damage.
Check tread depth (TM 9-2610-200-14).
b. Check tire pressure when tires are cool
(para 1-15).
NOTE
Turn lug nuts clockwise to tighten

and counterclockwise to loosen.
If vehicle is equipped with runflat

tires, torque lug nuts between 112
and 138 lb-ft (152 and 187 Nom). For
other tire configurations, torque lug
nuts between 110 and 120 Ib-ft (149
and 163 Nm).
c. Check wheels for damage and lug nuts
for tightness and presence.
12
Annual
Wheel Bearings
13
Annual
Service Brake
System
Clean, inspect, and pack wheel bearings

(para 4-43).
a. Perform service brake maintenance
(para 4-35).
b. Adjust service brakes (para 4-36).
14
Annual
Hydraulic Brake
System
a. Inspect wheel cylinders for leaks.
Any leaks are found.
b. Check hydraulic brake actuator assembly for damage and security of mounting.
c. Check hydraulic brake lines and fittings
for dents, cracks, loose connections, and
leaks.
15
Annual
Frame
Inspect frame for cracks, bent members,

and broken welds.
16
Annual
Road Test
Perform road test. Give special attention to

items that were repaired or adjusted. Be
alert for unusual or excessive noises that
may indicate damage, looseness, defects,
or deficient lubrication in attachments or
wheels.
4-6
Any leaks are found.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section IV. UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Paragraph
Number
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General............................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Electrical Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Quick Guide to Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 4-9
Troubleshooting Chart........................................................................................................................ 4-10
4-13.
GENERAL.
a.
This section provides information for identifying and correcting malfunctions that may develop while operating or
maintaining the trailers.
b.
The Quick Guide to Troubleshooting (para 4-15) lists common malfunctions of the trailer or its components and
refers you to the Troubleshooting Chart (para 4-16) for the appropriate troubleshooting procedures. You should
perform the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.
c.
If you are unsure of the location of an item mentioned in troubleshooting, refer to paragraph 1-12 or to the
maintenance task where the item is replaced.
d.
Before performing troubleshooting, read and follow all safety instructions listed in the warning summary at the
beginning of this manual.
e.
This section cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests or inspections and corrective actions. If a
malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by the corrective actions listed, notify your supervisor.
f.
When troubleshooting a malfunction:
Locate the symptom(s) in the Quick Guide to Troubleshooting (para 4-15) that best describes the
malfunction.
Turn to the page in the Troubleshooting Chart (para 4-16) where the troubleshooting procedures for the
symptom(s) in question are described.
Perform each step in the order listed until the malfunction is corrected. DO NOT perform any maintenance
task unless the troubleshooting procedure tells you to do so.
4-14.
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING.
a.
Paragraph 4-31 provides a schematic diagram for troubleshooting the chassis wiring harness.
b.
When troubleshooting any electrical system or component, exercise care in order to prevent electrical shock.
WARNING
When troubleshooting electrical system or electrical components,
be certain MASTER switch is OFF between every step unless
otherwise directed. To prevent injury due to electrical shock,
remove all jewelry and metal objects when working on electrical
system.
4-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-14.
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING (continued).
c.
The multimeter is used throughout electrical troubleshooting. When using the multimeter, make sure it is used
with a probe kit.
d.
When performing a continuity test, make sure all connectors and/or leads are disconnected from their
components. Probe the pins (or sockets) with a multimeter.
e.
When probing has been completed, place the red lead on the second pin (or connector) and probe with the black
lead in the same order. Do this until every pin has been probed with the red lead of the multimeter. Then place
the black lead of the multimeter on the connector and place the red lead on each pin (or socket) on the connector.
f.
If continuity is present between any two points, a short exists. Shorts must be repaired in order to continue any
operation.
g.
If instructed in a procedure to skip a pin (or socket) during a continuity test, it is because the pin (or socket) is not
used or is shielded.
h.
When a repair or replacement of a lead or wiring harness has been done, do the continuity test again to make
sure the problem has been corrected.
I.
When performing a continuity check, connect the meter probes to both terminals of the circuit you are testing.
Read the meter. Interpret the results. If the needle swings over to near 0 on the top scale, the circuit has
continuity. If the needle does not move, the circuit is open. If the needle jumps or flickers, there is a loose
connection.
j.
Check light bulbs for cracks or discoloration. Check the continuity of a light bulb by placing one probe of the meter
to the metal button base connection of the bulb and one probe to the metal side of the base. If the meter needle
swings over to 0 on the top scale, the circuit has continuity. If the meter needle does not move, the circuit is open,
indicating a defect.
4-8
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-15.
QUICK GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING.
ITEM
SYMPTOM
PARAGRAPH
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
NEITHER TAILLIGHT WORKS.
para 4-16a(1)
ONE TAILLIGHT DOES NOT WORK.
para 4-16a(2)
LAMPS/LEDS ARE DIM OR FLICKERING.
para 4-16a(3)
AXLE
AXLE IS LOOSE OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT.
para 4-16b(1)
BRAKES
HANDBRAKES WILL NOT OPERATE.
para 4-16c(1)
BRAKES WILL NOT RELEASE.
para 4-16c(2)
BRAKES DO NOT HOLD TRAILER AT HALT.
para 4-16c(3)
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM WILL NOT OPERATE.
para 4-16c(4)
TIRE WEAR IS ABNORMAL OR UNEVEN.
para 4-16d(1)
WHEEL IS WOBBLY.
para 4-16d(2)
FRONT SUPPORT LEG WILL NOT SWING UP

OR DOWN.
para 4-16e(1)
REAR STABILIZER
REAR STABILIZER WILL NOT OPERATE.
para 4-16f(1)
SUSPENSION
FRAME HITS SPRING ASSEMBLY OR RESTS

ON SPRING BUMPER.
para 4-16g(1)
para 4-169(2)
SPRING ASSEMBLY IS NOISY.
para 4-169(3)
WHEELS AND TIRES
FRONT SUPPORT LEG
4-9
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(1) NEITHER TAILLIGHT WORKS.
4-10
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (continued)
(1) NEITHER TAILLIGHT WORKS (continued).
4-11
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
(2) ONE TAILLIGHT DOES NOT WORK.
4-12
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
(3) LAMPS/LEDS ARE DIM OR FLICKERING.
continued on next page

4-13
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
(3) LAMPS/LEDS ARE DIM OR FLICKERING

(continued).
CONTINUED FROM D
4-14
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
a.
(3) LAMPS/LEDS ARE DIM OR FLICKERING

(continued).
CONTINUED FROM G
END OF TASK
4-15
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
b.
AXLE
(1) AXLE IS LOOSE OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT.

4-16
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
b.
AXLE (continued)
(1) AXLE IS LOOSE OR OUT OF ALIGNMENT

(continued).
CONTINUED FROM D
END OF TASK
4-17
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES
(1) HANDBRAKES WILL NOT OPERATE.

4-18
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES (continued)
(1) HANDBRAKES WILL NOT OPERATE (continued).
CONTINUED FROM D
END OF TASK
4-19
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES (continued)

4-20
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES (continued)
CONTINUED FROM D
END OF TASK
4-21
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES (continued)
(3) BRAKES DO NOT HOLD TRAILER AT HALT.
END OF TASK
4-22
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
c.
BRAKES (continued)
(4) HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM WILL NOT OPERATE.
END OF TASK
4-23
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
d.
WHEELS AND TIRES
(1) TIRE WEAR IS ABNORMAL OR UNEVEN.

4-24
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
d.
WHEELS AND TIRES (continued)
(1)
END OF TASK
4-25
TIRE WEAR IS ABNORMAL OR UNEVEN (continued).
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
d.
(1)

4-26
WHEEL IS WOBBLY.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
d.
(2)
END OF TASK
4-27
WHEEL IS WOBBLY (continued).
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
e.
FRONT SUPPORT LEG
(1)
END OF TASK
4-28
FRONT SUPPORT LEG WILL NOT SWING UP OR

DOWN.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
f.
REAR STABILIZER
(1)
END OF TASK
4-29
REAR STABLILIZER WILL NOT OPERATE.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
g.
SUSPENSION
(1)
END OF TASK
4-30
FRAME HITS SPRING ASSEMBLY OR RESTS ON

SPRING BUMPER
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
g.
SUSPENSION (continued)
(2)

4-31
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
g.
(2)
END OF TASK
4-32
TRAILER RIDES HARD OR SWAYS (continued).
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-16.
g.
(3)
END OF TASK
4-33
SPRING ASSEMBLY IS NOISY.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section V. GENERAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Paragraph
Number
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General.................................................................................................................................... 4-34
Work Safety............................................................................................................................. 4-34
Cleaning Instructions...............................................................................................................4-35
Inspection Instructions.............................................................................................................4-36
Tagging Parts ..........................................................................................................................4-37
Preservation of Parts...............................................................................................................4-37
Painting....................................................................................................................................4-37
Electrical Ground Points..........................................................................................................4-38
Hydraulic Brake Lines and Ports .............................................................................................4-38
Fluid Disposal..........................................................................................................................4-38
4-17.
GENERAL.
a.
These general maintenance instructions contain general shop practices and specific procedures you must be
familiar with to properly maintain your M101 and M116 Series trailers. You should read and understand these
practices and procedures before performing any maintenance task.
b.
Before beginning a task find out how much repair, modification, or replacement is needed to fix the equipment.
Sometimes the reason for equipment failure can be seen right away and complete teardown is not necessary.
Disassemble equipment only as far as necessary to repair or replace damaged parts.
c.
The following "Initial Setup" information applies to all procedures:

1.
Resources are not listed unless they apply to the procedure.
2.
"Personnel Required" is listed only if more than one technician is required to complete the task.
d.
All tags and forms attached to equipment must be checked to learn the reason for removal of equipment from
service. Modification work orders and technical bulletins must also be checked for equipment changes and
updates.
e.
In some cases, a part may be damaged by removal. If the part appears to be good and other parts behind it are
not defective, leave it on and continue with the procedure. Here are a few simple rules:
1.
Do not remove dowel pins or studs unless loose, bent, broken, or otherwise damaged.
2.
Do not remove bearings or bushings unless damaged. If you need to remove them to access parts, carefully
pull out bearings and bushings.
3.
Replace all gaskets, lockwashers, self-locking nuts, seals, cotter pins, preformed packings, and other locking
hardware.
4-18.
WORK SAFETY.
a.
Before beginning a procedure, think about the safety risks and hazards to yourself and others. Wear protective
gear, such as safety goggles or lenses, safety shoes, rubber apron, and gloves.
4-34
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-18.
WORK SAFETY (continued).
b.
Observe all WARNINGs and CAUTIONs.
c.
Clean up spilled fluids immediately, to avoid slipping.
d.
When lifting a heavy part, have someone help you. Make sure that lifting/jacking equipment is working properly,
meets the weight requirement of the part being lifted, and is securely fastened to the part.
e.
Always use power tools carefully.
f.
All maintenance should be performed with
4-19.
Trailer parking brake engaged;

Towing vehicle in neutral with parking brake engaged, if attached; and
Towing vehicle engine stopped, if attached.
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS.
WARNING
Improper cleaning methods and the use of unauthorized cleaning agents can injure personnel and
damage equipment. To prevent this, refer to TM 9247 for instructions.
a.
b.
General. Cleaning instructions will be the same for the majority of parts and components that make up the trailer.
The following applies to all cleaning operations:
1.
Clean all parts before inspection, after repair, and before assembly.
2.
Keep hands free of grease, which can collect dust, dirt, and grit.
3.
After cleaning, cover or wrap all parts to protect them from dust and dirt. Parts that are subject to rust should
be lightly oiled.
Steam Cleaning.
WARNING
Avoid contact with live steam, which can burn skin, cause blindness, and cause other serious
injury. Be sure to wear protective apron, gloves, and safety goggles around live steam.
1.
Before steam cleaning trailer, protect all electrical components that could be damaged by steam or moisture.
2.
Place disassembled parts in a suitable container to steam-clean. Parts that are subject to rust should be
dried and lightly oiled after cleaning.
4-35
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-19.
CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS (continued).
c.
Castings, Forgings, and Machined Metal Parts.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles and gloves
1.
Clean inner and outer surfaces with drycleaning solvent (Item 15, Appendix F).
2.
Remove grease and accumulated deposits with a scrub brush (Item 1, Appendix F).
WARNING
Compressed air used for cleaning or drying purposes, or for clearing restrictions, should never
exceed 30 psi (207 kPa). Wear protective clothing (goggles/shield, gloves, etc.) and use caution to
avoid injury to personnel.
3.
Clear out all threaded holes with compressed air to remove dirt and cleaning fluids.
CAUTION
DO NOT wash oil seals, electrical cables, and flexible hoses with drycleaning solvent or mineral
spirits. Serious damage or destruction of material will result.
d.
Oil Seals, Electrical Cables, and Flexible Hoses. Wash electrical cables and flexible hoses with a solution of
detergent (Item 5, Appendix F) and water and wipe dry.
e.
Bearings. Clean bearings in accordance with TM 9-214.
4-20.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS.
NOTE
All damaged areas should be marked for repair or replacement.
a.
All components and parts must be carefully checked to determine if they are serviceable, can be repaired, or must
be scrapped.
b.
Inspect drilled and tapped (threaded) holes for the following:

1.
In or around holes-wear, distortion (stretching), cracks, and any other damage.
2.
Threaded areas-wear, distortion (stretching), and evidence of cross-threading.

4-36
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-20.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS (continued).
c.
Inspect metal lines, flexible lines (hoses), and metal fittings and connectors for the following:
d.
1.
Metal lines-sharp kinks, cracks, bad bends, and dents.
2.
Flexible lines-fraying, evidence of leakage, and loose metal fittings or connectors.
3.
Metal fittings and connectors-thread damage and worn or rounded hex heads.
Inspect castings, forgings, and machined metal parts for the following:
1.
Machined surfaces-nicks, burrs, raised metal, wear, and other damage.
2.
Inner and outer surfaces-breaks and cracks.
e.
Inspect fittings and connectors for leaks by coating fittings and connectors with solution of detergent (Item 5,
Appendix F) and water. No leakage is permissible.
f.
Inspect bearings in accordance with TM 9-214.
4-21.
TAGGING PARTS.
a.
Use marker tags (Item 16, Appendix F) to identify all electrical wires, hydraulic lines, and any other parts that may
be hard to identify or replace later. Fasten a tag to the part during removal by wrapping a wire fastener around or
through the part and twisting the ends together. Position tags to be out of the way during cleaning, inspection,
and repair. Mark tags with a pencil, pen, or marker.
b.
Whenever possible, identify each electrical wire with the number of the terminal or wire to which it connects. If no
markings can be found, tag both wires or wire and terminal using the same identifying mark for both. If you cannot
tag a wire because it must fit through a small hole or you cannot reach it, write down a description of the wire and
the point at which it connects or draw a simple diagram on paper. Be sure to write down enough information so
you will be able to properly connect wires (or wire and terminal) during assembly. If you need to identify a loose
wire, look for identifying numbers near the end of the wire, stamped on a permanent metal tag. Compare this
number to the wire numbers on the wiring diagram (para 4-31).
c.
Identify and tag other parts as required by name and location.
d.
Remove all tags when finished.
4-22.
PRESERVATION OF PARTS.
Unpainted metal parts that will not be installed immediately after cleaning should be covered with a thin coat of lubricating
oil (Item 12, Appendix F).
4-37
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-23.
PAINTING.
On areas where paint has been removed, paint in accordance with the procedures outlined In TM 43-0139 and TB 430209. For camouflage painting instructions, refer to FM 20-3.
4-24.
ELECTRICAL GROUND POINTS.
Many electrical problems are the result of poor ground connections. You can ensure that ground connections are good by
performing the following steps:
a.
Remove hardware connecting ground cable terminal lug to ground point.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles and gloves
4-25.
b.
Clean mounting hardware, mounting surfaces, ground terminal lug, and ground point with drycleaning solvent
(Item 15, Appendix F) and scrub brush (Item 1, Appendix F).
c.
Remove any rust with wire brush (Item 2, Appendix F) and abrasive cloth (Item 3, Appendix F).
d.
Look for cracks, loose terminal lugs, and stripped threads. Replace any defective parts.
e.
Install hardware connecting ground cable terminal lug to ground point. Make sure all hardware is tight.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES AND PORTS.
To keep dirt from contaminating the hydraulic brake system when removing and installing hydraulic brake lines, perform
the following steps:
4-26.
a.
Clean fittings and surrounding area before disconnecting lines.
b.
Cover lines and ports after disconnecting lines. Use hand-carved wooden plugs, clean rags (Item 13,
Appendix F), duct tape (Item 18, Appendix F), or other similar materials to prevent dirt from entering system.
c.
Make sure new and used parts are clean before connecting.
d.
Wait to uncover lines and ports until just before connecting lines.
FLUID DISPOSAL.
Dispose of contaminated drained fluids in accordance with the SOP of your Unit.
4-38
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section VI. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-27.
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
General.................................................................................................................................... 4-39
Composite Stoplight-Taillight Maintenance .............................................................................4-39
Chassis Wiring Harness Replacement ...................................................................................4-43
Intervehicular Cable Replacement ..........................................................................................4-46
Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................................................4-48
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates removal and installation procedures for the composite stoplight-taillight, chassis
wiring harness, and Intervehicular cable.
4-28.
COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT MAINTENANCE.
This task covers:

a. Lamp/LED Removal
c. Composite Stoplight-Taillight Removal
Initial Setup:
Tools/Test Equipment:
General mechanic's tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B)
Materials/Parts:
Tag, marker (as needed) (Item 16, Appendix F)
Lockwasher (2), MS35338-46
a.
b.
d.
Lamp/LED Installation
Composite Stoplight-Taillight Installation
Starwasher (2), MS45904-76

Equipment Conditions:
Intervehicular cable disconnected from
LAMP/LED REMOVAL
NOTE
Both 12 V dc and 24 V dc lamps are
available. If towing vehicle is a CUCV,
12 V dc lamps should be used.
1.
Loosen six captive screws (1), and remove lens

(2) from body (3).
2.
Inspect preformed packing (4) for damage. If

damaged, remove preformed packing (4) and
discard.
3.
Remove two lamps (5 and 6) from sockets (7) by

pushing in and turning counterclockwise.
4-39
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-28.
COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT MAINTENANCE (continued).

NOTE
If lamps are present, perform step 4.
If LEDs are present, perform steps 5 and 6.
4.
Remove two lamps (8) from sockets (9) by pushing in and turning counterclockwise.
5.
Insert small flat-tipped screwdriver into slot inside center hole in LED (10). Push in firmly, turn counterclockwise,
and remove LED (10) from socket (9).
6.
Insert small flat-tipped screwdriver into slot on left side of LED (11) and open LED cover, allowing access to inside
slot in center hole. Push in firmly with screwdriver in center hole slot, turn counterclockwise slightly, and remove
LED (11) from socket (9).
NOTE
LEDs can be used to replace lamps that were removed.
To install LEDs, perform step 7.
To install lamps, perform step 8.
4-40
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-28.
b.
LAMP/LED INSTALLATION
1.
Install two LEDs (10 and 11) in sockets (9) by snapping into place by hand.
2.
Install two lamps (8) in sockets (9) by pushing in and turning clockwise.
3.
Install two lamps (5 and 6) in sockets (7) by pushing in and turning clockwise.
4.
If removed, install new preformed packing (4) in lens (2).
5.
Install lens (2) on body (3) and tighten six captive screws (1).
c.
COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT REMOVAL

NOTE
If marker bands are missing or illegible, tag wires for installation purposes (para 4-21).
1.
Remove four composite stoplight-taillight connectors (12) and chassis wiring harness connectors (13) from clip
(14) and disconnect connectors (12 and 13).
2.
Remove grommet (15) from hole (16) in frame.
3.
Pull four wires (17) of composite stoplight-taillight (18) through hole (16) in frame.
4.
Remove two capscrews (19), lockwashers (20), and washers (21) and composite stoplight-taillight (18) from
bracket (22). Discard lockwashers and washers.
5.
If bracket (22) is damaged, remove two self-locking nuts (23) and capscrews (24) and bracket (22) from frame.
Discard self-locking nuts.
4-41
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-28.
d.
COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT INSTALLATION
1.
If bracket (22) is removed, install bracket (22) on frame with two capscrews (24) and new self-locking nuts (23).
2.
Install composite stoplight-taillight (18) on bracket (22) with two new washers (21), new lockwashers (20), and
capscrews (19).
3.
Feed four wires (17) of composite stoplight-taillight (18) through hole (16) in frame.
4.
Position grommet (15) around four wires (17), and install grommet (15) through hole (16) in frame.
5.
Connect four composite stoplight-taillight connectors (12) on four chassis wiring harness connectors (13). Place
connectors (12 and 13) in clip (14).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Connect intervehicular cable to towing vehicle (para 2-13).

4-42
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-29.
CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a. Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
Lockwasher, MS35338-43
Lockwasher (5), MS45904-64 (M116A2E1 and
M 116A3)
Lockwasher (15), MS45904-64 (M101A2, M101A3,

and M116A2)
Strap, tiedown, electrical (2), MS3367-1-9
Intervehicular cable disconnected from towing
vehicle (para 2-15).
NOTE
Configuration of chassis wiring harness varies slightly with model. The M116A2 chassis trailer is shown.
a.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove four screws (1) and lockwashers (2)

and cover (3) from junction box (4) at road-side
drawbar (5). Discard lockwashers.
4-43
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-29.
CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT (continued).

NOTE
NOTE
The M116A2E1 and the M116A3 have
no lockwashers at loop clamp mountings
on rear crossmember and road- side
frame. A lockwasher is used at loop
clamp mounting on road-side drawbar.
5.
Remove 11 screws (14) and lockwashers (15)

from 11 loop clamps (16) securing chassis wiring
harness (13) to rear crossmember, road-side
frame, and road-side drawbar (5). Discard
lockwashers.
4-44
2.
At junction box at road-side drawbar (5), remove

chassis wiring harness connectors (6) and
intervehicular cable connectors (7) from clips (8)
and disconnect connectors (6 and 7).
3.
At curb-side and road-side rear of trailer, remove

chassis wiring harness connectors (9) and light
connectors (10) from clips (11) and disconnect
connectors (9 and 10).
4.
Remove electrical tiedown straps (12) from

chassis wiring harness (13). Discard tiedown
straps.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-29.
CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT (continued).
6.
At front road-side corner of frame, remove nut (17), screw (18), and lockwasher (19) from loop clamp (20) and
frame. Discard lockwasher.
7.
Remove chassis wiring harness (13) from frame. Remove 11 loop clamps (16) and loop clamp (20) from chassis
wiring harness (13).
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
Position chassis wiring harness (13) along rear crossmember, road-side frame, and road-side drawbar (5). Make
sure chassis wiring harness connectors (6 and 9) reach their points of connection. 2.At front road-side corner of
frame, install loop clamp (20) on frame with new lockwasher (19), screw (18), and nut (17).
NOTE
The M116A2E1 and the M116A3 have no lockwashers at loop clamp mountings on rear crossmember
and road-side frame. A lockwasher is used at loop clamp mounting on road-side drawbar.
3.
Install 11 loop clamps (16) securing chassis wiring harness (13) to rear crossmember, road-side frame, and roadside drawbar (5) with 11 new lockwashers (15) and screws (14).
4.
Loop excess chassis wiring harness (13) and secure with new electrical tiedown straps (12).
5.
At curb-side and road-side rear of trailer, connect chassis wiring harness connectors (9) to light connectors (10).
Place connectors (9 and 10) in clips (11).
6.
At junction box (4) at road-side drawbar (5), connect chassis wiring harness connectors (6) to intervehicular cable
connectors (7). Place connectors (6 and 7) in clips (8).
7.
Install cover (3) on road-side drawbar (5) with four new lockwashers (2) and screws (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
4-45
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-30.
INTERVEHICULAR CABLE REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a. Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
Self-locking nut, MS51922-21

Intervehicular cable disconnected from
NOTE
Configuration of intervehicular cable and mounting varies slightly with model.
a.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove four screws (1) and lockwashers (2) and cover (3) from junction box (4) at road-side drawbar (5).
Discard lockwashers.
NOTE
2.
At junction box (4) at road-side drawbar (5), remove chassis wiring harness connectors (6) and intervehicular
cable connectors (7) from clips (8) and disconnect connectors (6 and 7).
3.
Remove screw (9), lockwasher (10), and ground terminal (11) from road-side drawbar (5). Discard lockwasher.
4.
Remove two screws (12) and lockwashers (13) and retaining strap (14) from intervehicular cable (15) and roadside drawbar (5). Discard lockwashers.
4-46
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-30.
INTERVEHICULAR CABLE REPLACEMENT (continued).
5.
Remove self-locking nut (16) and loop clamp (17) from hydraulic brake actuator assembly (18). Remove loop
clamp (17) from intervehicular cable (15). Discard self-locking nut.
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
Position intervehicular cable (15) along road-side drawbar (5).
2.
Install ground terminal (11) on drawbar (5) with new lockwasher (10) and screw (9).
3.
Connect chassis wiring harness connectors (6) to intervehicular cable connectors (7). Place connectors (6 and 7)
in clips (8).
4.
Install retaining strap (14) on intervehicular cable (15) and road-side drawbar (5) with two new lockwashers (13)
and screws (12).
5.
Install loop clamp (17) on intervehicular cable (15). Install loop clamp (17) on hydraulic brake actuator assembly
(18) with new self-locking nut (16).
6.
Install cover (3) on junction box (4) at road-side drawbar (5) with four new lockwashers (2) and screws (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:

4-47
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-31.
WIRING DIAGRAM.
This wiring diagram is for the chassis wiring harness. Refer to this wiring diagram when performing troubleshooting or
maintenance on the electrical system of the M101 and M116 Series trailers.
Curb-Side Circuits
Road-Side Circuits
22-460
Service Stoplight and Turn Signal
22-461
Service Stoplight and Turn Signal
23
Blackout Stoplight
23
Blackout Stoplight
24-483
Blackout Taillight and Turn Signal
24-484
Blackout Taillight and Turn Signal
21
Service Taillight
21
Service Taillight
4-48
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section VII. BRAKE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
4-32
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-41
4-32.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General....................................................................................................................................4-49
Handbrake Lever and Linkage Replacement.......................................................................... 4-49
Handbrake Adjustment............................................................................................................ 4-54
Service Brake Maintenance .................................................................................................... 4-55
Service Brake Adjustment .......................................................................................................4-60
Wheel Cylinder Replacement..................................................................................................4-61
Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly Replacement..................................................................4-63
Master Cylinder Replacement .................................................................................................4-73
Hydraulic Brake Lines Replacement ....................................................................................... 4-76
Bleeding Hydraulic Brake System ...........................................................................................4-81
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates replacement, adjustment, and maintenance of the handbrake and hydraulic brake
system.
4-33.
HANDBRAKE LEVER AND LINKAGE REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a. Removal
c. Installation
b. Cleaning and Inspection
Initial Setup:
Self-locking nut (3), MS21042-5

Materials/Parts:
Rag (Item 13, Appendix F)
Solvent, drycleaning (Item 15, Appendix F)
Handbrakes released (para 2-10).
Hub and brakedrum removed (para 4-43).
WARNING
When performing maintenance on brake system, make sure wheels are securely chocked. Failure
to follow this warning may cause trailer to roll, resulting in serious injury or death to personnel or
4-49
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-33.
HANDBRAKE LEVER AND LINKAGE REPLACEMENT (continued).
a.
REMOVAL
1.
At wheel brake, pull spring (1) away from swaged sleeve (2) and unhook swaged sleeve (2) of cable assembly (3)
from handbrake lever (4).
2.
Compress lock tangs (5).
3.
Remove cable assembly (3) from handbrake lever (4) through backing plate (6).
4.
Remove two self-locking nuts (7) and machine screws (8), retaining strap (9), cable assembly (3), and spacer
plate (10) from frame (11). Discard self-locking nuts.
4-50
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-33.
5.
Remove two self-locking nuts (12), capscrews

(13), and spacers (14), handbrake lever (15),
and two washers (16) from frame (11). Discard
self-locking nuts.
6.
Disconnect cable assembly (3) from handbrake

lever (15).
7.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 for removal of other

handbrake lever and linkage.
b.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION

WARNING
1.
Clean all removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry.
2.
Inspect handbrake lever for bends, breaks, corrosion, and freedom of action.
damaged.
3.
Inspect cable assembly for frays, cracks, distortion, corrosion, and freedom of movement in conduit. Replace
cable assembly if damaged.
4.
Inspect all mounting hardware for damage. Replace if damaged.

4-51
Replace handbrake lever if
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-33.
c.
INSTALLATION
1.
Connect cable assembly (3) to handbrake lever

(15).
2.
Position two washers (16) at frame (11) and

install handbrake lever (15) with two spacers
(14), capscrews (13), and new self-locking nuts
(12).
CAUTION
Cable must be positioned below top spacer. To do otherwise causes cable to jump off pulley,
resulting in damage to cable.
3.
Feed cable assembly (3) through backing plate (6) and position at handbrake lever (4).
4.
Make sure lock tangs (5) are spread and hold cable assembly (3) in backing plate (6).
5.
Pull spring (1) away from swaged sleeve (2), and hook swaged sleeve (2) to handbrake lever (4).
4-52
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-33.
6.
Install spacer plate (10), cable assembly (3), and retaining strap (9) on frame (11) with two machine screws (8)
and new self-locking nuts (7).
7.
Repeat steps 1 through 6 for installation of other handbrake lever and linkage.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Install hub and brakedrum (para 4-43).
Install wheel and tire assembly (para 4-44).
Lubricate handbrake lever and linkage (Appendix I).
Adjust handbrakes (para 4-34).

4-53
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-34.
HANDBRAKE ADJUSTMENT.
This Task Covers:

Adjustment
Initial Setup:
Common No. 1 tool set (Item 2, Appendix B)
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
When performing maintenance on brake system, make sure wheels are securely chocked. Failure
to follow this warning may cause trailer to roll, resulting in serious injury or death to personnel or
1.
Chock wheels on side of trailer opposite side being adjusted.
2.
Place floor jack under axle (1) on side where handbrake is to be adjusted. Raise axle (1) until wheel and tire
assembly (2) is off the ground.
3.
Release handbrake lever (3) on side to be adjusted.
4.
Loosen lockscrew (4) at adjusting knob (5).
5.
Turn adjusting knob (5) clockwise until wheel and tire assembly (2) locks when handbrake lever (3) is no more
than two-thirds applied.
6.
Release handbrake lever (3) and make sure wheel and tire assembly (2) turns freely.
7.
Fully tighten lockscrew (4) at adjusting knob (5).
8.
Lower axle (1).
9.
Repeat steps 1 through 8 for other side.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-54
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-35.
SERVICE BRAKE MAINTENANCE.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
e.
Removal
Cleaning and Inspection
Installation
b.
d.
Disassembly
Assembly
Initial Setup:
Clamp, 11686281
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Lockwasher, MS35335-34

Materials/Parts:
a.
REMOVAL
WARNING
DO NOT handle brakeshoes, brakedrums, or other brake components unless area has been
properly cleaned. Asbestos dust, which can be dangerous if you touch it or breathe it, may be on
these components. Wear an approved filter mask and gloves. NEVER use compressed air or a
dry brush to clean brake components. Dust may be removed using an industrial-type vacuum
cleaner. Clean dust or mud away from brake components with water and a wet, soft brush or
cloth. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious illness or death to personnel.
NOTE
It is not necessary to remove backing plate and service brake assembly from axle in order to disassemble
service brake assembly. Disassembly may be performed with service brake assembly on axle or on work
bench.
4-55
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-35.
SERVICE BRAKE MAINTENANCE (continued).
1.
At wheel brake, pull spring (1) away from swaged sleeve

(2) and unhook swaged sleeve (2) of handbrake cable
assembly (3) from lever (4).
2.
Compress lock tangs (5).
3.
Remove handbrake cable assembly (3) from lever (4)

through backing plate (6).
NOTE
Use a suitable container to catch any draining brake
fluid. Make sure all spills are cleaned up.
4.
Disconnect hydraulic tube assembly (7) from wheel cylinder (8) at backing
plate (6).
5.
Remove five nuts (9), lockwashers (10), and capscrews (11) and backing
plate (6) from axle (12). Discard lockwashers.
4-56
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-35.
b.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove two springs (13) from two brakeshoes (14 and 15) and anchor pin (16). Remove plate (17) from anchor pin
(16).
2.
Remove spring (18) and adjusting screw (19) from two brakeshoes (14 and 15).
3.
Remove two retainers (20), springs (21), and pins (22) from two brakeshoes (14 and 15) and backing plate (6).
4.
Remove two brakeshoes (14 and 15), strut (23), and spring (24) from backing plate (6).
5.
Remove clamp (25), spring tension washer (26), and lever (4) from brakeshoe (15). Discard clamp.
6.
Remove bolt (27), lockwasher (28), and wheel cylinder (29) from backing plate (6). Discard lockwasher.
c.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles
and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and
clothes, and DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
1.
Clean all removed components with drycleaning

solvent and rag and allow to dry.
4-57
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-35.
2.
Inspect backing plate for cracks, breaks, corrosion, or other damage. Replace backing plate if damaged.
WARNING
If one brakeshoe is being replaced, replace all brakeshoes on axle. Combination of old
brakeshoes with new brakeshoes will cause uneven braking. Accidents causing serious injury or
death to personnel or damage to equipment may result.
3.
Inspect brakeshoe linings for cracks or grease. Measure lining thickness. Lining thickness must be at least 1/8 inch
(3.18 mm). Replace brakeshoes if damaged, grease soaked, or worn.
4.
Inspect strut and lever for cracks and wear. Replace if damaged.
5.
Inspect adjusting screw for corrosion or wear on teeth. Replace adjusting screw if corroded or worn.
6.
Inspect wheel cylinder for leakage and corrosion. Replace if damaged.
7.
Inspect all other removed components for cracks, breaks, distortion, corrosion, or other damage. Replace any
damaged components.
d.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Install wheel cylinder (29) on backing plate (6) with new

lockwasher (28) and bolt (27). Torque bolt between 130 and
230 lb-in (15-26 N-m).
2.
Install lever (4) on brakeshoe (15) with spring tension washer

(26) and new clamp (25). Pinch ends of clamp (25) to retain it
securely in place.
4-58
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-35.
3.
Install two brakeshoes (14 and 15), pins (22), and springs (21) on backing plate (6). Install two retainers (20), spring
(24), and strut (23) on backing plate (6).
4.
Turn in adjusting screw (19) fully. Install adjusting screw (19) and spring (18) between two brakeshoes (14 and 15).
5.
Install plate (17) on anchor pin (16).
6.
Install two springs (13) on anchor pin (16)

and brakeshoes (14 and 15).
e.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install backing plate (6) and service brake

assembly on axle (12) with five capscrews
(11), new lockwashers (10), and nuts (9).
2.
Connect hydraulic tube assembly (7) to

wheel cylinder (8) at backing plate (6).
3.
Feed handbrake cable assembly (3)

through backing plate (6) and position at
lever (4). Make sure lock tangs (5) are
spread and hold handbrake cable
assembly (3) securely in backing plate (6).
4.
Pull spring (1) away from swaged sleeve

(2), and hook swaged sleeve (1) to lever
(4).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Bleed hydraulic brake system (para 4-41).
Adjust service brakes (para 4-36).
4-59
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-36.
SERVICE BRAKE ADJUSTMENT.
This Task Covers:
Adjustment
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B)
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
The procedure for adjusting service brake is the same for left side and right side.
1.
Apply handbrake (para 2-10). Chock wheel and tire assembly (1) opposite side of service brake being adjusted.
2.
Raise axle (2) on side being adjusted until wheel and tire assembly (1) is off the ground.
3.
Release handbrake on side being adjusted (para 2-10).
4.
Remove cover (3) from backing plate (4).
5.
While turning wheel and tire assembly (1), turn adjusting screw (5) until brakes drag lightly. Then turn adjusting screw
(5) in opposite direction one click.
6.
Install cover (3) in backing plate (4).
7.
Lower axle (2). Apply handbrake on adjusted side (para 2-10).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
4-60
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-37.
WHEEL CYLINDER REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
Removal
Installation
b.
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Lockwasher, MS35335-34

Materials/Parts:
a.
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use a suitable container to catch any draining brake fluid. Make sure all spills are cleaned up.
If removing or replacing wheel cylinder, do steps 1 and 2 only. If removing or replacing bleeder valve
only, do step 3 only.
1.
Disconnect hydraulic brake tube assembly (1) at inlet to wheel cylinder (2).
2.
Remove bolt (3), lockwasher (4), wheel cylinder (2), and link (5) from backing plate (6). Discard lockwasher.
3.
Remove bleeder valve (7) from wheel cylinder (2).
4-61
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-37.
b.
WHEEL CYLINDER REPLACEMENT (continued).

WARNING
1.
Clean all removed components, except wheel cylinder, with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry. Wipe wheel
cylinder with a clean rag.
2.
Inspect components for cracks, breaks, corrosi on, or damaged threads. Replace if damaged.
c.
INSTALLATION
1.
If removed, install bleeder valve (7) on wheel cylinder (2).

CAUTION
Make sure boot of wheel cylinder is dry before installing wheel cylinder. Failure to follow this
caution may cause brake fluid to damage brakeshoe linings.
2.
Assemble wheel cylinder (2) and link (5) at backing plate (6), with link engaged in primary brakeshoe (8). Install new
lockwasher (4) and bolt (3) on wheel cylinder (2). Torque bolt between 130 and 280 lb-in (15-26 Nom).
3.
Connect hydraulic brake tube assembly (1) to inlet of wheel cylinder (2).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Adjust service brake (para 4-36).
4-62
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
e.
Removal
Installation
b.
d.
Disassembly
Assembly
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Lockwasher (4), 210104-8S

Self-locking nut (8), MS21044N8
Self-locking nut, MS21083-C7
Materials/Parts:
Brush, wire (Item 2, Appendix F)

Detergent (Item 5, Appendix F)

a.
REMOVAL
1.
Place jackstand under drawbar (1) at each front corner of frame.
2.
Remove self-locking nut (2) and loop clamp (3), with intervehicular cable (4) from hydraulic brake actuator assembly
(5). Discard self-locking nut.
NOTE
Use a suitable container to catch any draining brake fluid.
4-63
Make sure all spills are cleaned up.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (continued).
3.
Disconnect hydraulic brake front tube assembly (6) from connector (7) at master cylinder (8).
4.
Remove self-locking nut (9), capscrew (10), and safety chain (11 ) from each of two drawbars (1). Discard self
locking nuts.
NOTE
Bracket and adjustable front support leg is a one-piece welded assembly.
5.
Remove self-locking nut (12), capscrew (13), and bracket with front support leg (14) from bracket and plunger
assembly (15). Discard self-locking nut.
6.
Remove two screws (16) and loosen

hydraulic line (17) from curb-side
drawbar (1).
4-64
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
7.
Remove fluid passage bolt (18), washer (19), connector (20), and washer (21) from master cylinder (8).
8.
Remove four self-locking nuts (22) and capscrews (23) from

hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5), bracket and plunger
assembly (15), and two drawbars (1). Discard self-locking
nuts.
9.
Remove bracket and plunger assembly (15), with hydraulic

brake actuator assembly (5), from two drawbars (1).
10. Remove two nuts (24), lockwashers (25), and capscrews

(26) from bracket and plunger assembly (15) and hydraulic
brake actuator assembly (5). Discard lockwashers.
11. Remove two capscrews (27) and lockwashers (28) from bracket and plunger assembly (15), and separate hydraulic
brake actuator assembly (5) from bracket and plunger assembly (15). Discard lockwashers.
b.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove self-locking nut (29) and capscrew (30) from

channel (31). Discard self-locking nut.
NOTE
On newer-model trailers, spacers are
welded to inside of channel.
2.
Remove two self-locking nuts (32) and capscrews (33), four

spacers (34), and master cylinder (8) from channel (31).
4-65
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
3.
Remove eight self-locking nuts (35), four links (36) and shafts (37), eight bearings (38), and drawbar coupler (39)
from channel (31). Discard self-locking nuts.
4.
Remove self-locking nut (40), capscrew (41), and shock absorber (42) from drawbar coupler(39). Discard selflocking nut.
NOTE
Boot may be in master cylinder.
5.
Remove self-locking nut (43) and socket head screw (44) from drawbar coupler (39) and pushrod (45). Remove
washer (46), spring (47), pushrod (45), and boot (48) from drawbar coupler (39). Discard self-locking nut.
6.
Remove self-locking nut (49), capscrew (50), and breakaway lever (51), with chain (52) from channel (31). Discard
self-locking nut.
7.
If damaged, remove chain (52) from breakaway lever (51).
4-66
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.

NOTE
For trailers with master cylinder cap, do step 8. For trailers with drain hose, do steps 9 and 10.
8.
Remove cap (53) and gasket (54) from master cylinder (8). Discard gasket if damaged.
9.
Loosen clamp (55) and remove drain hose (56) from vent tube (57).
10. Remove vent tube (57), filler cap (58), baffle (59), and gasket (60) from master cylinder (8). Discard gasket if
damaged.
c.

WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective goggles and
gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and
DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
1.
Clean all removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry. Clean boot with detergent and
water.
2.
Inspect all removed components for wear, breaks, cracks, damaged welds, corrosion, or other damage. Replace if
damaged.
3.
Inspect breakaway lever for worn ratchet teeth. Replace if damaged.
4.
Remove any corrosion with a wire brush.
5.
Inspect for a worn slot in pushrod. Replace pushrod if slot is worn.
6.
Inspect for a weak or broken spring. Replace if damaged.
7.
Inspect shock absorber for leaks or bad rubber bushings. Replace if damaged.
8.
Inspect master cylinder for leaks. Replace if damaged.

4-67
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
9.Inspect channel for broken leaf spring (61). If leaf spring (61) is damaged, replace hydraulic brake actuator assembly
(5).
d.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE
For trailers with master cylinder cap, do step 1.
For trailers with drain hose, do steps 2 and 3.
1.
Install gasket (54) and cap (53) on master cylinder (8) and finger-tighten.
2.
Install gasket (60), baffle (59), filler cap (58), and vent tube (57) on master cylinder (8).
3.
Install drain hose (56) on vent tube (57) and tighten clamp (55).
4.
If removed, install chain (52) on breakaway lever (51).
5.
Position breakaway lever (51) in channel (31) with ratchet teeth facing leaf spring (61). Install capscrew (50) and new
self-locking nut (49) on breakaway lever (51). Torque self-locking nut between 10 and 15 Ib-ft (14-20 Nm)
6.
If removed. attach boot (48) to rod end of pushrod (45). Assemble spring (47) and washer (46) on slot end of
pushrod (45). Install slot end of pushrod (45) on drawbar coupler (39) with socket head screw (44) and new selflocking nut (43). Torque self-locking nut between 20 and 25 Ib-ft (27-34 Nm).
7.
Install piston rod end of shock absorber (42) on drawbar coupler (39) with capscrew (41) and new self-locking nut
(40). Torque self-locking nut between 20 and 25 Ib-ft (27-34 Nm).
8.
Install drawbar coupler (39) on channel (31) with eight bearings (38), four shafts (37) and links (36), and eight new
self-locking nuts (35). Torque self-locking nuts between 35 and 40 Ib-ft (47-54 Nm).
9.
Install other end of shock absorber (42) on channel (31) with capscrew (30) and new self-locking nut (29). Torque
self-locking nut between 20 and 25 Ib-ft (27-34 Nm).
4-68
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
4-69
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
NOTE
On newer-model trailers,
spacers are welded to inside
of channel.
10. Position master cylinder (8) and four

spacers (34) in channel (31) with boot
(48) engaged in pushrod (45). Install
two capscrews (33) and new selflocking nuts (32) on master cylinder (8).
Torque self-locking nuts between 10
and 15 Ib-ft (14-20 Nm).
e.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5) on bracket and plunger assembly (15) with two new lockwashers (28) and
capscrews (27). Install two capscrews (26), new lockwashers (25), and nuts (24) on bracket and plunger assembly (15).
4-70
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38. HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (continued).
2. Position hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5) with bracket and plunger assembly (15), at two drawbars (1).
3.
Install four capscrews (23) and new self-locking nuts (22) on hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5), bracket and
plunger assembly (15), and two drawbars (1). Torque self-locking nuts between 44 and 54 Ib-ft (60-73 N.m).
4.Install washer (21), connector (20), washer

(19), and fluid passage bolt (18) on master
cylinder(8). Torque fluid passage bolt between
35 and 40 Ib-ft (47-54 N-m).
5.Install hydraulic line (17) on curb-side drawbar
(1) with two screws (16).
NOTE
Bracket and adjustable front
support leg is a one-piece
welded assembly.
6.
Install bracket with front support leg (14) on bracket

and plunger assembly (15) with capscrew (13) and
new self-locking nut (12).
7.
Install two safety chains (11) on hydraulic brake

actuator assembly (5), bracket and plunger
assembly (15), and two drawbars (1) with two
capscrews (10) and new self-locking nuts (9).
Torque self-locking nut between 165 and 175 Ib-ft
(224-237 Nom).
4-71
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-38.
8.
Connect hydraulic brake front tube assembly (6) to connector (7) at master cylinder (8).
9.
Install loop clamp (3), with intervehicular cable (4) on hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5) with new self-locking nut
(2).
10. Make sure front support leg (14) is locked in lowered position. Remove jackstands from under two drawbars (1).
11. If a new hydraulic brake actuator assembly (5) was installed, install new brake fluid caution decal to hydraulic brake
actuator assembly (5) (para 1-13).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Lubricate hydraulic brake actuator assembly and service master cylinder as required (Appendix I).

4-72
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-39.
MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
Removal
Installation
b.
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Solvent, drycleaning (Item 15, Appendix F)

Materials/Parts:
a.
REMOVAL
NOTE
1.
Disconnect hydraulic brake front tube assembly (1) from connector (2) at master cylinder (3).
NOTE
On newer-model trailers, spacers are welded to inside of channel.
2.
Remove two self-locking nuts (4) and capscrews (5), four spacers (6),
and master cylinder (3) from channel (7). Discard self-locking nuts.
4-73
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-39.
MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT (continued).

NOTE
The boot may be inside hydraulic brake acuator assembly.
3.
4.
Remove boot (8) from master cylinder (3) or from inside hydraulic brake actuator assembly (9).
Remove fluid passage bolt (10), washer (11), connector (2), and washer (12) from master cylinder (3).
NOTE
For trailers with master cylinder cap, do step 5. For trailers with drain hose, do step 6.
5.
Remove cap (13) and gasket (14) from master cylinder (3). Discard gasket If damaged.
6.
Loosen clamp (15) and remove drain hose (16) from vent tube (17).
7.
Remove vent tube (17), filler cap (18), baffle (19), and gasket (20) from master cylinder (3). Discard gasket if
damaged.
b.

WARNING
gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and
DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
1. Clean all removed components except boot with drycleaning solvent and allow to dry. Clean boot with detergent and
water.
4-74
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-39.
MASTER CYLINDER REPLACEMENT (continued).
2.
Inspect boot for tears. Replace if damaged.
3.
Inspect master cylinder and mounting hardware for cracks, damaged threads, or other damage. Replace if damaged.
c.
INSTALLATION
NOTE
For trailers with master cylinder cap, do steps 1 and 2. For trailers with drain hose, do steps 3 and 4.
1.
Install gasket (14) and cap (13) on master cylinder (3).
2.
Install fluid passage bolt (10), washer (11), connector (2), and washer (12) on master cylinder (3).
3.
Install gasket (20), baffle (19), filler cap (18), and vent tube (17) on master cylinder (3).
4.
Install drain hose (16) on vent tube (17) and tighten clamp (15).
NOTE
On newer-model trailers, spacers are welded to inside of channel.

5.
Position boot (8), master cylinder (3), and four spacers (6) in channel (7) with boot (8) engaged inside hydraulic brake
actuator assembly (9). Install two capscrews (5) and new self-locking nuts (4) on master cylinder (3). Torque selflocking nuts between 10 and 15 Ib-ft (14-20 Nom).
6.Connect hydraulic brake front tube assembly (1) to connector (2) at master cylinder (3).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Service master cylinder (Appendix I).

4-75
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-40.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
e.
g.
Front Tube Assembly Removal

Rear Tube Assembly Removal
Hose Assembly Removal
Left and Right Tube Assemblies Removal
b.
d.
f.
h.
Front Tube Assembly Installation

Rear Tube Assembly Installation
Hose Assembly Installation
Left and Right Tube Assemblies Installation
Initial Setup:
Lockwasher, MS35338-44
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Self-locking nut, MS51922-6 (M101A2, M101A3,

M116A2, and M116A3)
Materials/Parts:
NOTE
Quantity of mounting hardware varies slightly with model. Quantities indicated in task are for the
M101A3 and the M116A3.
For information on manufacturing tube assemblies, refer to Appendix G.
a.
FRONT TUBE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1.
Remove five screws (1) from five loop clamps (2) along curb-side drawbar (3).
2.
Disconnect front tube assembly (4) from connector (5) at master cylinder (6).
3.
Disconnect front tube assembly (4) from coupling (70. Remove front tube assembly from curb-side drawbar.
4.
Remove five loop clamps (2) from front tube assembly (4).
4-76
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-40.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES REPLACEMENT (continued).
b.
FRONT TUBE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1.
Install five loop clamps (2) on front tube assembly (4).
2.
Position front tube assembly (4) along curb-side drawbar (3) and connect to coupling (7).
3.
Connect front tube assembly (4) to connector (5) at master cylinder (6).
4.
Install five loop clamps (2) on curb-side drawbar (3) with five screws (1).
c.
REAR TUBE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1.
Remove two screws (8) from two loop clamps (9) along curb-side frame (10).
2.
Disconnect rear tube assembly (11) from coupling (7).
3.
On the M101A2 and M116A2, remove self-locking nut (12) and screw (13) from loop clamp (14) along crossmember.
Disconnect rear tube assembly (11 ) from hose assembly (15) and remove. Discard self-locking nut.
4.
On the M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3, remove rear tube assembly (11) from hose assembly (15) at retaining ring
(16).
5.On the M101A2 and M 116A2, remove two loop clamps (9) and loop clamp (14) from rear tube assembly (11).
4-77
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-40.
d.
REAR TUBE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1.
On the M101 A2 and M116A2, install two loop clamps (9) and loop clamp (14) on rear tube assembly (11).
2.
Position rear tube assembly (11) along curb-side frame (10) and crossmember.
3.
On the M101 A3, Ml 16A2E1, and Ml 16A3, connect rear tube assembly (11) to hose assembly (15) at retaining ring
(16).
4.
On the M101 A2 and Ml 16A2, connect rear tube assembly (11) to hose assembly (15). Secure loop clamp (14) to
crossmember with screw (13) and new self-locking nut (12).
5.
Connect rear tube assembly (11) to coupling (7).
6.
Install two loop clamps (9) on curb-side frame (10) with two screws (8).
4-78
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-40.
e.
HOSE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL
1.
Disconnect hose assembly (15) from tee (17) at axle.
2.
Remove copper gasket (18), if present, from hose assembly (15).
3.
On the M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3, remove retaining ring (16) from hose assembly (15) and release hose
assembly (15) from bracket (19) on crossmember.
4.
Remove hose assembly (15) from rear tube assembly (11).
f.
HOSE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
1.
Connect hose assembly (15) to rear tube assembly (11).
2.
On the M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3, secure hose assembly (15) to bracket (19) on crossmember with retaining
ring (16).
3.
Install copper gasket (18), if present, on hose assembly (15).
4.
Connect hose assembly (15) to tee (17) at axle.
4-79
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-40.
g.
LEFT AND RIGHT TUBE ASSEMBLIES REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect tube assembly (20) from wheel cylinder (21).

Disconnect tube assembly (20) from tee (17) and remove from axle.
NOTE
Do steps 3 and 4 to remove tee from axle.
3.
Disconnect hose assembly (15) from tee (17). Remove copper gasket (18), if present, from hose assembly (15).
4.
Remove capscrew (22), washer (23), tee (17), and lockwasher (24) from axle. Discard lockwasher.
h.
LEFT AND RIGHT TUBE ASSEMBLIES INSTALLATION

NOTE
Do steps 1 and 2 to install tee on axle.

The procedure for installing assemblies is the same for left side and right side.
1.
Install new lockwasher (24), tee (17), washer (23), and capscrew (22) on axle.
2.
Install copper gasket (18), if present, on hose assembly (15). Connect hose assembly (15) to tee (17).
3.
Position tube assembly (20) along axle and connect to tee (17).
4.
Connect tube assembly (20) to wheel cylinder (21).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:

4-80
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-41.
BLEEDING HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM.
This Task Covers:
Bleeding
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Tubing, plastic (Item 20, Appendix F)
Materials/Parts:
Fluid, brake (Item 6, Appendix F)
Jar (Item 8, Appendix F)
Handbrakes applied (para 2-10).
WARNING
When performing maintenance on brake system, make sure wheels are securely chocked.
Failure to follow this warning may cause trailer to roll, resulting in serious injury or death to
personnel or damage to equipment.
BLEEDING
1.
Release breakaway lever (1) by pulling up on leaf spring (2) and pushing down on breakaway lever (1). Release leaf
spring (2).
2.
Remove cap (3) and gasket (4) from master cylinder (5).
3.
Fill master cylinder (5) with brake fluid to within 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) of top. Install gasket (4) and cap (3) on master
cylinder (5) and finger-tighten.
4-81
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-41.
BLEEDING HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM (continued).
4.
Install one end of hose (6) over bleeder valve (7) at wheel cylinder (8). Place free end of hose (6) in clean jar (9).
5.
Fill jar (9) half full with brake fluid. Make sure free end of hose (6) is below the level of brake fluid.
NOTE
Make sure master cylinder is kept
full of brake fluid at all times during
bleeding or air will enter the system,
making it necessary to bleed the
system again.
6.
Apply and release breakaway lever (1) four to five times, to apply
pressure to brake system.
7.
Leave breakaway lever (1) in applied position.
8.
Open bleeder valve (7) to release air from brake system. Air is
being released if there are air bubbles in jar (9).
9.
Close bleeder valve (7). Remove hose (6) from bleeder valve (7)
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until fluid in jar (9) is free of air bubbles.
11. Release breakaway lever (1).
12. Remove cap (3) and gasket (4) from master cylinder (5). Discard gasket if damaged.
13. Fill master cylinder (5) with brake fluid.
14. Install gasket (4) and cap (3) on master
cylinder (5).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-82
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section VIII. WHEELS, HUBS, AND BRAKEDRUMS MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-45
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
General ...............................................................................................................................................4-83
Hub, Brakedrum, and Wheel Bearings Maintenance .........................................................................4-83
Wheel and Tire Assembly Replacement ............................................................................................4-90
Tire and Tube Maintenance.................................................................................................................4-91
4-42. GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates maintenance procedures for hubs, brakedrums, wheel bearings, wheel and tire
assembly, tires, and tubes.
4-43. HUB, BRAKEDRUM, AND WHEEL BEARINGS MAINTENANCE.
This Task Covers:

a.
c.
e.
Removal
Installation
b.
d.
f.
Disassembly
Assembly
Wheel Bearing Adjustment
Initial Setup:
Cotter pin, MS24665-425
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1, Appendix B) Seal, 12313027

Materials/Parts:
Wheel and tire assembly removed (para 4-44).
Cloth, abrasive (Item 3, Appendix F)

Handbrakes released (para 2-10).
Grease (Item 7, Appendix F)

References:

TM 9-214
WARNING
properly cleaned. Asbestos dust, which can be dangerous if you touch it or breathe it, may
be on these components. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious illness or death
to personnel.
a.
REMOVAL
1.
Support vehicle with suitable jackstands at front and rear corners on side being maintained.
4-83
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43.
2.
HUB, BRAKEDRUM, AND WHEEL BEARINGS MAINTENANCE (continued).
Remove grease cap (1) from hub (2).
3.
Remove cotter pin (3) from spindle (4). Discard cotter pin.
NOTE
Configurations may vary. If trailer has key washers, do step 4. If trailer is equipped with
retainers and washers, do step 5.
4.
Remove nut (5), two key washers (6), and outer bearing (7) from spindle (4).
4-84
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43. HUB, BRAKEDRUM, AND WHEEL BEARINGS MAINTENANCE (continued).

5.
Remove retainer (8), nut (9), washer (10), and outer bearing (7) from spindle (4).
6.
Remove hub (2) and brakedrum (11), as an assembly, from spindle (4).
b.DISASSEMBLY
1.
Remove seal (12) and inner bearing (13) from hub (2). Discard seal.
2.
Remove two machine screws (14) from hub (2) and brakedrum (1 ). Separate hub (2) and brakedrum (11).
3.
Remove outer and inner cups (15 and 16) from hub (2).
4.
If damaged, drive out eight shoulder bolts (17) from hub (2) and discard.
4-85
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43.HUB, BRAKEDRUM, AND WHEEL BEARINGS MAINTENANCE (continued).

c.CLEANING AND INSPECTION
WARNING
Wear an approved filter mask and gloves. NEVER use compressed air or a dry brush to
clean brake components. Dust may be removed using an industrial-type vacuum cleaner.
Clean dust or mud away from brake components with water and a wet, soft brush or
cloth.
gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes,
and DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
1. Clean and inspect inner and outer bearings and cups in accordance with TM 9-214. If any bearing or cup needs
replacing, all bearings and cups must be replaced.
2. Clean all other removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry.
3. Wipe spindle clean with drycleaning solvent and rag. Inspect spindle for cracks, bends, and scored or discolored
bearing surfaces. If threads are damaged, restore. Notify Direct Support maintenance if spindle is damaged beyond
repair.
4. Inspect hub for cracks, breaks, and burrs. Remove burrs with abrasive cloth. Replace hub if damaged.
5. Inspect brakedrum for cracks, scoring, pitting, and grooves. Notify Direct Support maintenance if brakedrum is
damaged.
6. Inspect all remaining components for damage. Replace if damaged.
d.ASSEMBLY
1. If removed, drive eight new shoulder bolts (17) into
hub (2).
2. Install outer and inner cups (15 and 16) in hub (2).
3. Align holes in brakedrum (11) with holes in hub (2).
Loosely install two machine screws (14) in
brakedrum (11).
4. Tap brakedrum (11) against hub (2) with soft-faced
hammer. Fully tighten two machine screws (14).
5. Pack inner bearing (13) with grease and install in hub
(2).
6. Install new seal (12) in hub (2).
4-86
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43.
UB, BRAKEDRUM, AND WHEEL BEARINGS MAINTENANCE (continued).
e.INSTALLATION
1. Lightly coat spindle (4) with grease.
2. Install hub (2) and brakedrum (11), as an assembly, on spindle (4).
3. Pack outer bearing (7) with grease and install on spindle (4).
NOTE
Configurations may vary. If trailer has key washers, do step 4. If trailer is equipped with
retainers and washers, do step 5.
4. Install two key washers (6) and nut (5) on spindle (4).
4-87
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43.
5. Install washer (10), nut (9), and retainer (8) on spindle (4).
6. Perform wheel bearing adjustment (subpara f).
f.WHEEL BEARING ADJUSTMENT

NOTE
If performing wheel bearing adjustment as part of troubleshooting when wheel and

tire assembly has not been removed, perform steps 1 through 12.
If performing wheel bearing adjustment as a follow-on to hub, brakedrum, and
wheel bearings maintenance, perform steps 5 through 12 only.
1. Apply handbrakes (para 2-10). Chock wheel and tire assembly opposite the side being adjusted. Raise vehicle at front
and rear corners of side being maintained until wheel and tire assembly is clear of ground. Support vehicle with
suitable jackstand.
2. Release handbrake on side being adjusted (para 2-10).
3. Remove grease cap (1) from hub (2).
4. Remove cotter pin (3) from spindle (4). Discard cotter pin.
4-88
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-43.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Loosen nut (5) on spindle (4) until hub (2) and brakedrum (11) turn freely.
Torque nut (5) to 30 Ib-ft (41 Nom) while turning hub (2) and brakedrum (11), to seat bearings.
Back off nut (5) 1/16 turn. Finger-tighten nut.
Install new cotter pin (3) in spindle (4) and bend back ends. Make sure hub (2) and brakedrum (11) turn freely.
Install grease cup (1) on hub (2).
If removed, install wheel and tire assembly (para 4-44).
Remove jackstands and lower vehicle.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-89
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-44.
WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
Tools/Test Equipment: Equipment Conditions:

Handbrakes applied (para 2-10).
NOTE
This procedure shows replacement of the M116A2 or M116A2E1 wheel and tire
assembly.
a.REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chock wheel and tire assembly (1) opposite side being removed.
Loosen eight nuts (2) on wheel and tire assembly (1).
Raise and support axle (3) on side where wheel and tire assembly (1) is being removed.
Remove eight nuts (2) from wheel and tire assembly (1). Remove wheel and tire assembly (1) from shoulder bolts (4).
b.INSTALLATION
1. Install wheel and tire assembly (1) on
shoulder bolts (4).
2. Install eight nuts (2) on wheel and tire
assembly (1) and tighten alternately and
evenly.
3. Remove support from axle (3) and lower
wheel and tire assembly (1) to the ground.
4. Torque eight nuts (2) alternately and evenly
between 110 and 120 Ib-ft (149-163 Nm).
FOLLOW ON TASKS:
None
4-90
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-45.
TIRE AND TUBE MAINTENANCE.
To remove tire from wheel, to repair tube (if present), or to repair wheel and run flat assembly (M101 A3 and Ml 16A3),
refer to TM 9-2610-200-14.
4-91
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section IX. FRAME AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-46.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General ...........................................................................................................................................
Spring Hanger Replacement...........................................................................................................
Lift Shackle Replacement ...............................................................................................................
Eyebolt Replacement......................................................................................................................
Drawbar Replacement ....................................................................................................................
Adjustable Front Support Leg Replacement ...................................................................................
Safety Chains Replacement ...........................................................................................................
4-92
4-92
4-97
4-98
4-99
4-101
4-103
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates removal and installation procedures for spring hangers, lift shackles, eyebolts,
drawbars, the adjustable front support leg, and safety chains.
4-47.
SPRING HANGER REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a. Front Spring Hanger Removal
c. Cleaning and Inspection
e. Front Spring Hanger Installation
b. Rear Spring Hanger Removal

d. Rear Spring Hanger Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
4-92
Cotter pin (2), MS24665-633 (M101A2, M101A3,

M1 16A2)
Cotter pin (2), MS24665-357 (M1 16A2E1 and M116A3)
Lubrication fitting (2), MS15001-1
Self-locking nut (8), MS17829-6F (4 for rear spring
hanger, 4 for front spring hanger)
Self-locking nut, MS51922-49 (front spring hanger)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-47.
SPRING HANGER REPLACEMENT (continued).
a. FRONT SPRING HANGER REMOVAL

1. Place floor jack under vehicle on side where front spring hanger (1) is being removed. Use floor jack to raise trailer.
Place suitable support under front corner of vehicle.
2. Lower vehicle until weight of trailer rests on support at the front corner. Some weight will be on floor jack.
3. Remove cotter pin (2), slotted nut (3), and shackle
pin (4) from spring (5) and front spring hanger (1).
Remove lubrication fitting (6) from shackle pin (4).
Discard cotter pin and lubrication fitting.
4. Lower floor jack until spring (5) is clear of front spring
hanger (1).
5. Remove self-locking nut (7) and capscrew (8) from
drawbar (9) and front spring hanger (1). Discard
self-locking nut.
6. Remove four self-locking nuts (10), washers (11),
and capscrews (12) and front spring hanger (1) from
frame (13). Discard self-locking nuts.
4-93
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-47.
b. REAR SPRING HANGER REMOVAL

1. Place floor jack under vehicle on side where rear spring hanger (14) is being removed. Use floor jack to raise trailer.
Place suitable support under rear corner of vehicle.
2. Lower vehicle until weight of trailer rests on support at the rear corner. Some weight will be on floor jack.
3. Remove cotter pin (15), slotted nut (16), and shackle pin (17) from shackle (18) and rear spring hanger (14). Remove
lubrication fitting (19) from shackle pin (17). Discard cotter pin and lubrication fitting.
4. Lower floor jack until shackle (18) is clear of rear spring hanger (14).
5. Remove four self-locking nuts (20), washers (21), and capscrews (22) and rear spring hanger (14) from frame
4-94
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
447.

NOTE
Remove bushing only if damaged.
6. Remove bushing (23) from rear spring hanger (14).

c. CLEANING AND INSPECTION
c.

WARNING
1. Clean all removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry. Make sure lubrication passages in
shackle pins are free of grease.
2. Inspect all removed components for cracks, breaks, corrosion, and damaged threads. Replace if damaged.
d. REAR SPRING HANGER INSTALLATION

1. If removed, install bushing (23) in rear spring hanger (14).
2. Install rear spring hanger (14) on frame (13) with four capscrews (22), washers (21), and new self-locking nuts (20).
Torque self-locking nuts to 30 Ib-ft (41 Nm).
3. Use floor jack to raise vehicle until shackle (18) is aligned with rear spring hanger (14).
4. Install shackle pin (17) through shackle (18) and rear spring hanger (14).
5. Install slotted nut (16) on shackle (18) and tighten. Install new cotter pin (15) on shackle (18).
6. Install new lubrication fitting (19) in shackle pin (17).
7. Remove support from rear comer of vehicle. Remove floor jack from under vehicle.
4-95
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-47.
e. FRONT SPRING HANGER INSTALLATION

1. Install front spring hanger (1) on frame (13) with four capscrews (12), washers (11 ), and new self-locking nuts (10).
Torque self-locking nuts to 30 Ib-ft (41 Nm).
2. Install drawbar (9) on front spring hanger (1) with capscrew (8) and new self-locking nut (7). Torque self-locking nut
between 140 and 150 Ib-ft (190-203 Nom).
3. Use floor jack to raise vehicle until spring (5) is aligned with front spring hanger (1).
4. Install shackle pin (4) through spring (5) and front spring hanger (1).
5. Install slotted nut (3) on shackle pin (4) and tighten. Install new cotter pin (2) on shackle pin (4).
6. Install new lubrication fitting (6) in shackle pin (4).
7. Remove support from front corner of vehicle. Remove floor jack from under vehicle.
4-96
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-48.
LIFT SHACKLE REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
General mechanics tool kit (Item 1,
Appendix B)
Materials/Parts:
a. REMOVAL
1. On the M101A2 and M116A2, remove cotter pin (1), straight headed pin (2), and lift shackle (3) from bracket (4).
Discard cotter pin.
2. On the M101A3, M116A2E1, and M1 16A3, remove self-locking nut (5), capscrew (6), and lift shackle (3) from bracket
b. INSTALLATION
1. On the M101A2 and M116A2, install lift shackle (3) on bracket (4) with straight headed pin (2) and new cotter pin (1).
2. On the M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3, install lift shackle (3) on bracket (4) with capscrew (6) and new self-locking
nut (5).
4-97
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-49.
EYEBOLT REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
Self-locking nut (2), MS21044-N8
a. REMOVAL
1.
2.
b.
1.
2.
Remove self-locking nut (1), capscrew (2), and spacer (3) from eyebolt (4) and drawbar (5). Discard self-locking nut.
Remove self-locking nut (6) and eyebolt (4) from frame (7). Discard self-locking nut.
INSTALLATION
Install eyebolt (4) on frame (7) with new self-locking nut (6).
Install spacer (3), capscrew (2), and new self-locking nut (1) on eyebolt (4) and drawbar (5).
4-98
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-50.
DRAWBAR REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
Self-locking nut, MS21044-N8
Intervehicular cable removed from road-side

drawbar (para 4-30).
Chassis wiring harness removed from road-side
drawbar, if removing road-side drawbar (para 4-29).
Hydraulic brake lines removed from curb-side
drawbar, if removing curb-side drawbar (para 4-40).
Hydraulic brake actuator assembly removed
(para 4-38).
NOTE
The procedure for removing and installing drawbars is the same for left side and right
side.
a. REMOVAL
1. Raise trailer and place suitable support at
rear corners and at midpoint of vehicle.
2. Place jackstand under drawbar (1) being
removed.
3. Remove self-locking nut (2) and capscrew
(3) from drawbar (1) and front spring hanger
4. Remove self-locking nut (5), capscrew (6),
and spacer (7) from drawbar (1) and two
eyebolts (8). Discard self-locking nut.
4-99
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-50.
DRAWBAR REPLACEMENT (continued).
5.
6.
b.
1.
2.
3.
Pull drawbar (1) forward, away from vehicle, and remove.

If replacing drawbar (1), remove data plate (para 4-63).
INSTALLATION
If removed, install data plate (para 4-63).
Position drawbar (1) under frame and support with jackstand.
Loosely install drawbar (1) on two eyebolts (8) with spacer (7), capscrew (6), and new self-locking nut (5). Torque selflocking nut (5) between 35 and 40 Ib-ft (47-54 Nm).
4. Loosely install drawbar (1) on front spring hanger (4) with capscrew (3) and new self-locking nut (2). Torque selflocking nut (2) between 140 and 150 Ib-ft (190-203 Nm).
5. Remove supports from rear of vehicle.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Install hydraulic brake lines on curb-side drawbar, if installing curb-side drawbar (para 4-40).
Install chassis wiring harness on road-side drawbar, if installing road-side drawbar (para 4-29).
Install Intervehicular cable on road-side drawbar (para 4-30).
Install hydraulic brake actuator assembly (para 4-38).
4-100
TM 9-2330-202-14P
4-51.
ADJUSTABLE
FRONT SUPPORT LEG REPLACEMENT.
This TaskCovers:
a.
c.
Removal
Installation
b. Cleaning and Inspection
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:

- Grease (Item 7, Appendix F)

- Rag (Item 13, Appendix F)
- Solvent, drycleaning (Item 15, Appendix F)
- Self-locking nut, MS51922-61

a.
REMOVAL
1.
Place jackstand under both drawbars (1) to

support front of trailer.
2.
Remove self-locking nut (2) and capscrew (3)

from adjustable front support leg (4) and bracket
and plunger assembly (5). Discard self-locking
nut.
3.
Pull out on plunger (6) and remove adjustable

front support leg (4) from bracket and plunger
assembly (5).
4.
Remove handcrank (7) from stowage bracket

(8) by removing cotter pin (9) from stowage
bracket (8).
5.
If damaged, remove cotter pin (9) from chain

(10). Discard cotter pin.
6.
11
6
Remove two screws (11) and cap (12) from

adjustable front support leg (4).
12
4
7
8
10
9
Change 1 4-101
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-51. ADJUSTABLE FRONT SUPPPORTLEG REPLACEMENT(continued).

b.
CLEANING
ANDINSPECTION
WARNING
Drycleaning
solventP-D-680
istoxicandfammable.
Always
wearprotective
goggles
and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and
clothes,andDONOTbreathevapors.DONOTusenearopenflameorexcessiveheat.
1.
Clean all removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry.
2.
Inspect all components for wear, cracks, broken welds, or corrosion. Replace if damaged.
c.
INSTALLATION
1.
Fill cavity of adjustable front support leg (4) with grease. Install cap (12) on adjustable front
support leg (4) with two screws (11).
2.
If removed, install new coffer pin (9) on chain (10).
3.
Pull out plunger (6) and position adjustable

front support leg (4) at bracket and plunger
assembly (5). Push in plunger to hold leg.
4.
Install capscrew (3) and new self-locking nut

(2) on adjustable front support leg (4) and
bracket and plunger assembly (5).
5.
Use handcrank (7) to make sure adjustable

front support leg (4) is in fully lowered position.
Push in plunger (6) to lock it in position.
6.
Stow handcrank (7) on stowage bracket (8)

with cotter pin (9).
7.
Remove jackstands from both drawbars (1).

12
4
7
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
- None
10
9
4-102
Change 1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-52.
SAFETY CHAINS REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
NOTE
Mounting capscrew for safety chains passes through hydraulic brake actuator assembly components.
a. REMOVAL
Remove self-locking nut (1), capscrew (2), and two safety chains (3) from two drawbars (4) and drawbar bracket assembly
b. INSTALLATION
Install two safety chains (3) on two drawbars (4) and drawbar bracket assembly (5) with capscrew (2) and new self-locking
nut (1). Torque self-locking nut between 165 and 175 Ib-ft (224-237 Nm).
4-103
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section X. SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
4-53
4-54
4-55
General ...................................................................................................................................
Spring Assembly Replacement...............................................................................................
Shock Absorbers Replacement ..............................................................................................
4-53.
Page
Number
4-104
4-104
4-108
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates removal and installation procedures for the spring assemblies and shock absorbers.
4-54.
SPRING ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
c.
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
Cotter pin (3), MS24665-633 (M101A2 and M116A2)
Lubrication fitting (3), MS15001-1
Materials/Parts:
removed (para 4-44).
Rag (Item 13, Appendix F)Wheel and tire assembly
Cotter pin (3), MS24665-357 (M101A3, M116A2E1,

Personnel Required: Two and M116A3)
WARNING
Use extreme caution when handling heavy parts. Lifting device is required when
parts weigh over 50 pounds (23 kg) for a single-person lift, over 100 pounds (45
kg) for a two-person lift, and over 150 pounds (68 kg) for a three-person or more
lift. Keep clear of heavy parts supported only by lifting device. Failure to follow
this warning may cause serious injury or death to personnel.
a.
1.
2.
3.
REMOVAL
Place floor jack under axle (1), raise trailer, and place suitable support at rear of trailer.
Lower axle (1) until weight of trailer rests on support at rear of trailer. Some weight will be on floor jack.
Remove four self-locking nuts (2) and washers (3), two U-bolts (4), and bumper (5) from axle (1) and spring assembly
(6). Discard self-locking nuts.
4. Remove screw (7) from handbrake cable clip (8) on frame (9).
4-104
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-54.
SPRING ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT (continued).
5. Lower axle (1) approximately 4 inches (10 cm) to take weight off spring assembly (6).
6. At rear spring hanger (10), remove cotter pin (11), slotted nut (12), and shackle pin (13) from two shackles (14 and 15)
and, with the aid of an assistant, remove spring assembly (6). Discard cotter pin.
7. At front spring hanger (16), remove cotter pin (17), slotted nut (18), and shackle pin (19) from front spring hanger (16)
and spring assembly (6). Discard cotter pin.
8. Remove spring assembly (6) from frame (9).
NOTE
Shackle pin should fit in rear spring hanger with slight resistance.
9. At rear spring hanger (10), check play between shackle pin (20) and rear spring hanger (10). Looseness indicates a
damaged shackle pin (20) inside rear spring hanger (step 11).
10. Remove cotter pin (21), slotted nut (22), shackle pin (20), and two shackles (14 and 15) from rearspring hanger (10).
Discard cotter pin.
4-105
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-54.
11. Remove lubrication fitting (23) from each of three shackle pins (19, 20, and 13) and discard.
b. CLEANING AND INSPECTION

WARNING
1. Clean all removed components with drycleaning solvent and rag and allow to dry. Make sure lubrication passages in
shackle pins are clear.
2. Inspect all removed components for cracks, breaks, corrosion, or damaged threads. Replace if damaged.
c. INSTALLATION
1. Loosely install two shackles (14
and 15) on rear spring hanger (10)
with shackle pin (20) and slotted
nut (22).
2. Position spring assembly (6) above
axle (1).
3. At front spring hanger (16), loosely
install spring assembly (6) on frame
(9) with shackle pin (19) and slotted
nut (18).
4. At rear spring hanger (10), loosely
install spring assembly (6) on two
shackles (14 and 15) with shackle
pin (13) and slotted nut (12).
5. Use floor jack to raise axle (1) until
it contacts underside of spring
assembly 6). Engage spring
assembly center bolt head (24) with
hole in spring mounting pad (25).
4-106
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-54.
6. Install bumper (5) on spring assembly (6). Install two U-bolts (4) into grooves of bumper (5) and through holes in
spring plate (26).
7. Install four washers (3) and new self-locking nuts (2) on two U-bolts (4).
8. Tighten slotted nuts (22, 12, and 18).
9. Align holes for three cotter pins (17, 21, and 11 ) with slots in slotted nuts (22, 12, and 18) and install three new cotter
pins (17, 21, and 11).
10. Install new lubrication fitting (23) in each of three shackle pins (19, 20, and 13).
11. Install screw (7) into handbrake cable clip (8) on frame (9) and tighten.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Lubricate shackle pins (Appendix I).
4-107
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-55.
SHOCK ABSORBERS REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
c.
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:

Self-locking nut (2), MS21044N10 (M101A2, M101A3,

and M116A2)
Materials/Parts:
Self-locking nut (2), MS51922-53 (M116A2E1

and M116A3)
a. REMOVAL
1. Remove two self-locking nuts (1) from upper and lower mounting studs (2 and 3). Discard self-locking nuts.
2. Remove two recessed washers (4) and bushings (5), shock absorber (6), and two bushings (7) from upper and lower
mounting studs (2 and 3).
b. CLEANING AND INSPECTION
WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective
goggles and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open
flame or excessive heat.
1. Clean upper and lower mounting studs and all mounting hardware except bushings with drycleaning solvent and rag
and allow to dry.
2. Clean bushings with detergent and water solution.
4-108
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-55.
SHOCK ABSORBERS REPLACEMENT (continued).
3. Inspect upper and lower mounting studs for cracks, bends, or bad threads. Notify Direct Support maintenance if
damaged.
4. Replace all damaged components.
c. INSTALLATION
1. Install two bushings (7), shock absorber (6) with thicker dust shield end at top, and two bushings (5) on upper and
lower mounting studs (2 and 3).
2. Install two recessed washers (4) and new self-locking nuts (1) on upper and lower mounting studs (2 and 3). Torque
self-locking nuts between 20 and 25 Ib-ft (27-34 Nm).
4-109
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section XI. BODY MAINTENANCE

Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
4-56
4-57
4-58
4-59
General ...................................................................................................................................
Cargo Body Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3).................................................................
Tailgate Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3).......................................................................
U-Bolt Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3)..........................................................................
4-56.
Page
Number
4-110
4-110
4-113
4-115
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates removal and installation procedures for the cargo body, tailgate, and U-bolts.
4-57.
CARGO BODY REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3).
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Personnel Required: Two
Materials/Parts:
WARNING
parts weigh over 50 pounds (23 kg) for a single-person lift, over 1 00 pounds (45
a. REMOVAL
1. Attach a suitable lifting device to cargo body (1).
4-110
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-57.
CARGO BODY REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
2. Remove eight self-locking nuts (2), square neck bolts (3), and clamps (4) securing cargo body (1) to frame (5).
3. At each of two rear corner mounting brackets (6), remove two self-locking nuts (7) and capscrews (8) from mounting
bracket (6). Discard self-locking nuts.
4. At rear chassis sill, remove self-locking nut (9) and capscrew (10) from cargo body (1) and frame (5). Discard selflocking nut.
5. At each of two midchassis mounting brackets (11), remove self-locking nut (12) and capscrew (13) from mounting
brackets (11). Discard self-locking nuts.
6. At front chassis sill, remove three self-locking nuts (14) and capscrews (15) from cargo body (1) and frame (5).
7. With the aid of an assistant, lift cargo body (1) from frame (5). Remove lifting device from cargo body (1).
4-111
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-57.
b.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CARGO BODY REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
INSTALLATION
Attach a suitable lifting device to cargo body (1).
With the aid of an assistant, lift cargo body (1) onto frame (5) and align mounting holes.
At front chassis sill, loosely install three capscrews (15) and new self-locking nuts (14) on cargo body (1) and frame (5).
At each of two midchassis mounting brackets (11 ), loosely install capscrew (13) and new self-locking nut (12) on
mounting brackets (11).
At rear chassis sill, loosely install capscrew (10) and new self-locking nut (9) on cargo body (1) and frame (5).
At each of two rear corner mounting brackets (6), loosely Install two capscrews (8) and new self-locking nuts (7) on
mounting brackets (6).
Insert eight square neck bolts (3), clamps (4), and new self-locking nuts (2) into cargo body (1).
Torque 18 self-locking nuts (14, 2, 9, 7, and 12) between 26 and 31 Ib-ft (35-42 Nm).
Remove lifting device from cargo body (1).
4-112
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-58.
TAILGATE REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3).
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
Cotter pin (4), MS24665-353

WARNING
parts weigh over 50 pounds (23 kg) for a single-person lift, over 100 pounds (45
a. REMOVAL
1. Remove two latch pins (1) from cargo body (2) and release top corners of tailgate (3) from cargo body (2).
2. Open and lower tailgate (3) and support it with wood blocks.
4-113
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-58.
TAILGATE REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3) (continued).
WARNING
Hold tailgate in place before removing straight headed pins. If tailgate is not properly supported it
may fall, causing injury to personnel.
3. With the aid of an assistant, remove four cotter pins (4) and straight headed pins (5) from four hinges (6) and eyebolts
(7). Discard cotter pins.
4. With the aid of an assistant, remove tailgate (3) from cargo body (2).
b. INSTALLATION
1. With the aid of an assistant, position tailgate (3) at cargo body (2) and support tailgate (3) with wood blocks.
2. With the aid of an assistant, align four hinges (6) with eyebolts (7) and install four straight headed pins (5) through
hinges (6) with heads facing away from center of tailgate (3).
3. With the aid of an assistant, install four new cotter pins (4) in four straight headed pins (5).
4. Raise tailgate (3) and secure to top corners of cargo body (2) with two latch pins (1).
4-114
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-59.
U-BOLT REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3).
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
a.
REMOVAL
Remove two nuts (1), lockwashers (2), and washers (3), plate (4), and U-bolt (5) from cargo body (6).
lockwashers.
b.
INSTALLATION
Install U-bolt (5) on cargo body (6) with plate (4) and two washers (3), new lockwashers (2), and nuts (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-115
Discard
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section XII. ACCESSORY ITEMS MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
4-60
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-60.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General.................................................................................................................................................... 4-116
Canvas Cover Assembly Grommet and Rope Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3)............................ 4-116
Reflector Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3) ..................................................................................... 4-117
Data Plate Replacement ......................................................................................................................... 4-118
GENERAL.
This section describes and illustrates removal and installation procedures for the canvas cover assembly grommet and
rope, reflectors, and data plates.
4-61.
CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLY GROMMET AND ROPE REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3).
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
a.
REMOVAL
1.
Cut rope (1) from canvas cover assembly (2).

Discard rope.
2.
Remove two grommets (3) from canvas cover

assembly (2).
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install two grommets (3) on canvas cover

assembly (2).
2.
Feed new rope (1) through two grommets (3)

and loop securely around grommets (3). Install
clip (4) on rope (1) and crimp.
3.
Install end clip (5) on end of rope (1) and crimp.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-116
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-62.
REFLECTOR REPLACEMENT (M101A2 AND M101A3).
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b. installation
Initial Setup:
a.
Materials/Parts:
REMOVAL
Remove two nuts (1), lockwashers (2), and screws (3) and reflector (4) from cargo body (5). Discard lockwashers.
b.
INSTALLATION
NOTE
Reflector should be installed on cargo body with heads of screws on inside of cargo body.
Install reflector (4) on cargo body (5) with two screws (3), new lockwashers (2), and nuts (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
4-117
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-63.
DATA PLATE REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b.
Installation
Initial Setup:
a.
Materials/Parts:
Drive screw (6), MS21318-35
REMOVAL
WARNING
Wear eye protection when driving heads off drive screws or rivets. Failure to follow this warning may
result in eye injury or loss of vision.
NOTE
Newer-model trailers may use rivets instead of drive screws.
Drive heads off six drive screws (1) or rivets. Remove drive screws (1) or rivets and data plate (2) from cargo body or
frame. Discard drive screws or rivets.
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
If serial number is missing, add to data plate (2).
2.
Install data plate (2) on cargo body or frame with six new drive screws (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASLS
None
4-118
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
SectionXIII.SPECIALPURPOSEKITSMAINTENANCE
4-64. REAR STABILIZER REPLACEMENT.
ThisTaskCovers:
b. Installation
a. Removal
Initial Setup:
Materials/Parts:
- Lockwasher (4), 20-14-5
a.
REMOVAL
Release latch hook (1) from up-latch pin (2). Lower rear stabilizer (3) to the ground.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove self-locking nut (4), shoulder

bolt (5), and rear stabilizer (3) from
bracket (6). Discard self-locking nut.
Remove cotter pin (7), straight pin (8),
and latch hook (1) from rear stabilizer
(3). Discard cotter pin.
Remove spring (9) and latch hook (1)
from rear stabilizer (3).
Remove lubrication fitting (10) from
rear stabilizer (3).
4
6
-e>
3
Change1
4-119
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-64. REAR STABILIZER REPLACEMENT(continued).

Remove two nuts (11), capscrews (12), lockwashers (13), and bracket (6) from frame (14) and bracket (15).
Discard lockwashers.
Remove two nuts (16), capscrews (17), lockwashers (18), and brackets (15) and (19) from frame (14). Discard
6.
7.
lockwashers.
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
Install brackets (15) and (19) on frame (14) with two capscrews (17), new lockwashers (18), and nuts (16).
Install bracket (6) on frame (14) and bracket (15) with two capscrews (12), new lockwashers (13), and
2.
nuts (11).
Install lubrication fitting (10) on rear stabilizer (3).
Install spring (9) and latch hook (1) on rear stabilizer (3).
Install latch hook (1) on rear stabilizer (3) with straight pin (8) and new cotter pin (7).
Install rear stabilizer (3) on bracket (6) with shoulder bolt (5) and new self-locking nut (4).
Swing rear stabilizer (3) up until latch hook (1) hooks onto up-latch pin (2).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
16
9
4
14
1>
18
3
17
13
12
2
FOLLOW-ON TASK:
Lubricate rear stabilizer (Appendix 1).
4-120
Change 1
j9@
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section XIV. PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION MARKING
Paragraph
Number
4-65
4-66
4-67
4-65.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General.......................................................................................................................................... 4-121
Painting.......................................................................................................................................... 4-121
Stenciling ....................................................................................................................................... 4-121
GENERAL.
This section gives instruction references for painting and stenciling the M101 and M116 Series trailers.
4-66.
PAINTING.
a.
Instructions for the preparation of materiel for painting, methods of painting, and materials to be used are
contained in TM 43-0139.
b.
Instructions for camouflage painting are contained in FM 20-3 and TB 43-0209.
4-67.
STENCILING.
Refer to TB 43-0209 for instructions on the application of stencils.
4-121
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section XV. PREPARATION FOR STORAGE AND SHIPMENT

Paragraph
Number
4-68
4-69
4-70
4-71
Table 4-2
4-72
4-73
4-74
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General.......................................................................................................................................... 4-122
Definition of Administrative Storage .............................................................................................. 4-122
Preparation of Equipment for Administrative Storage ................................................................... 4-123
Care of Equipment in Administrative Storage ............................................................................... 4-124
Exercise Schedule......................................................................................................................... 4-125
Procedures for Common Components and Miscellaneous Items ................................................. 4-125
Removal of Equipment from Administrative Storage .................................................................... 4-126
Preparation of Equipment for Shipment ........................................................................................ 4-126
4-68.
GENERAL.
a.
This section contains requirements and procedures for the administrative storage of equipment that is issued to
and in use by Army activities worldwide.
b.
The requirements specified herein are necessary to maintain equipment in administrative storage in such a way as
to achieve maximum readiness condition.
c.
Equipment that is placed in administrative storage should be capable of being readied to perform its mission within
a 24-hour period, or as otherwise prescribed by the approving authority. Before equipment is placed in
administrative storage, current PMCS procedures should be completed and deficiencies corrected.
d.
Report equipment in administrative storage as prescribed for all reportable equipment (refer to AR 200-1).
e.
Perform inspections, maintenance services, and lubrication as specified herein.
f.
Records and reports to be maintained for equipment in administrative storage are those prescribed by DA Pam
738-750 for equipment in use.
g.
A 10 percent variance is acceptable on time, running hours, or mileage used to determine the required
maintenance actions.
h.
Accomplishment of applicable PMCS, as mentioned throughout this section, will be on a semiannual basis.
4-69.
DEFINITION OF ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
The placement of equipment in administrative storage can be for short periods of time when a shortage of maintenance
effort exists. Items should be ready for use within the time factors determined by the directing authority. During the
storage period, appropriate maintenance records will be kept.
4-122
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-70.
PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT FOR ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Storage Site
a.
Select the best available site for administrative storage. Separate stored equipment from equipment in use.
Conspicuously mark the area "Administrative Storage."
b.
Covered space is preferred.
c.
Open sites should be improved hardstand, if available. Unimproved sites should be firm, well drained, and free of
excessive vegetation.
Storage Plan
a.
Store equipment so as to provide maximum protection from the elements and access for inspection, maintenance,
and exercising. Anticipate removal or deployment problems and take suitable precautions.
b.
Take into consideration environmental conditions, such as extreme heat and cold; high humidity; blowing sand,
dust, or loose debris; soft ground; mud; heavy snows; or any combination thereof. Take adequate precautions in
regard to environmental conditions.
c.
Establish a fire plan and provide for adequate fire-fighting equipment and personnel.
NOTE
Steps d and e apply to the M101A2 and M101A3 trailers.
d.
Remove, fold, and stow the canvas cover assembly (para 2-16).
e.
Remove and stow the rack and tailgate assembly (para 2-16).
Maintenance Services and Inspection

a.
Prior to storage, perform the next scheduled Unit PMCS.
b.
Inspect and approve the equipment prior to storage. Do not place in storage equipment that is not mission
capable.
Auxiliary Equipment and Basic Issue Items

a.
Process auxiliary equipment and basic issue items (Bll) simultaneously with the major item to which they are
assigned.
b.
If possible, store auxiliary equipment and BII with the major item.
c.
If stored apart from the major item, mark auxiliary equipment and BII with tags indicating the major item and its
registration or serial number and location, and store in protective-type enclosures. In addition, place a tag or list
indicating the location of the removed items in a conspicuous place on the major item.
Correction of Shortcomings and Deficiencies

Correct all shortcomings and deficiencies prior to storage, or obtain a deferment from the approving authority.
4-123
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-70.
PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT FOR ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Lubrication
Lubricate equipment in accordance with instructions in Appendix I.
General Cleaning, Painting, and Preservation
CAUTION
Do not direct water or steam, under pressure, against unsealed electrical systems or any exterior opening.
Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment.
a.
Clean dirt, grease, and other contaminants from the equipment, but do not use vapor degreasing.
b.
Remove rust and damaged paint by scraping, wire brushing, sanding, or buffing. Sand to a smooth finish and
spot-paint as necessary (refer to TB 43-0209).
c.
After cleaning and drying, immediately coat unpainted metal surfaces with oil or grease, as appropriate (Appendix
I). For information on the proper preservation of M101A2 and M101A3 trailers, refer to SB 740-98-1.
4-71.
CARE OF EQUIPMENT IN ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Maintenance Services
After equipment has been placed in administrative storage, inspect, service, and exercise as specified in this paragraph.
Inspection
Inspection will usually be visual and must consist of at least a walk-around examination of all equipment to detect any
deficiencies. Inspect equipment in open storage weekly, and inspect equipment in covered storage monthly. Inspect all
equipment immediately after any severe storm or environmental change. The following are examples of things to look for
during a visual inspection:
a.
Low or flat tires.
b.
Condition of preservatives, seals, and wraps.
c.
Corrosion or other deterioration.
d.
Missing or damaged parts.
e.
Water in compartments.
f.
Any other readily recognizable shortcomings or deficiencies.
Repair During Administrative Storage

Keep equipment in an optimum state of readiness. Accomplish the required services and repairs as quickly as possible.
Whenever possible, perform all maintenance on-site.
4-124
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-71.
CARE OF EQUIPMENT IN ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE (continued).
Exercising
Exercise equipment in accordance with Table 4-2 and the following instructions:
a.
Depreserve equipment by removing only that material restricting exercise. Remove blocks and perform all beforeoperation checks. Couple trailer to towing vehicle and drive for at least 25 miles (40 km). Make several right and
left 90-degree turns. Make several hard braking stops without skidding. During exercise when it is convenient and
safe, operate all other functional components and perform all during- and after-operation checks.
b.
Scheduled services will include inspection per the "Inspection" paragraph (p. 4-124) and will be conducted in
accordance with Table 4-2. Lubricate in accordance with the instructions in Appendix I.
c.
Immediately take action to correct shortcomings and deficiencies noted. Record inspection and exercise results
on DA Form 2404. Record and report all maintenance actions on DA Form 2407. After exercising, restore the
preservation to the original condition. Replenish lubricants used during exercising and note the amount on DA
Form 2408.
Table 4-2. Exercise Schedule
Rotation
Rotate items in accordance with any rotational plan that will keep the equipment in operational condition and reduce the
maintenance effort.
4-72.
PROCEDURES FOR COMMON COMPONENTS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS.
Tires
Visually inspect tires during each walk-around inspection. This inspection includes checking tires with a tire gage. Inflate,
repair, or replace as necessary those tires found to be low, damaged, or excessively worn. Mark inflated and repaired
tires with a crayon for checking at the next inspection.
Seals
Seals may develop leaks during storage or shortly thereafter. If leaking persists, refer to the applicable maintenance
section in this manual for corrective maintenance procedures.
4-125
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
4-73.
REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT FROM ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE.
Activation
Restore equipment to normal operating condition in accordance with the instructions contained in Chapter 4, Section II.
Servicing
Resume the maintenance service schedule in effect at the commencement of storage, or service the equipment before the
scheduled dates in order to produce a staggered workload.
4-74.
PREPARATION OF EQUIPMENT FOR SHIPMENT.
a.
Refer to FM 55-21, TM 55-601, and TM 743-200-1 for additional instructions on processing, storage, and shipment
of materiel.
b.
Trailers shipped on flatcars require wheel blocking in accordance with the Association of American Railroads rules
governing the loading of commodities on "open top" cars.
c.
Trailers that have been removed from storage for shipment do not have to be reprocessed if they will reach their
destination within the administrative storage period. Reprocess only if inspection reveals any corrosion or if intransit weather conditions make it necessary.
d.
When a trailer is received and has already been processed for domestic shipment, as indicated on DD Form 1397,
the trailer does not have to be reprocessed for storage unless corrosion and deterioration are found during the
inspection upon receipt. List, on SF Form 364, all discrepancies found because of poor preservation, packaging,
packing, marking, handling, loading, storage, or excessive preservation. Repairs that cannot be handled by the
receiving unit must have tags attached listing needed repairs. A report of these conditions will be submitted by the
Unit commander for action by an ordnance maintenance Unit.
4-126
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
CHAPTER 5
DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE
Section I. AXLE MAINTENANCE
5-1.
AXLE REPLACEMENT.
This Task Covers:

a.
Removal
b. Installation
Initial Setup:
Field maintenance tool set (Item 5, Appendix B)
Shock absorbers removed (para 4-54).
Hydraulic brake lines removed from axle (para 4-39).
Service brakes removed (para 4-34).
Materials/Parts:

WARNING
Use extreme caution when handling heavy parts. Lifting device is required when parts weigh
over 50 pounds (23 kg) for a single-person lift, over 100 pounds (45 kg) for a two-person lift,
and over 150 pounds (68 kg) for a three-person or more lift. Keep clear of heavy parts
supported only by lifting device. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death to personnel.
NOTE
Replacement of axle is the same for all models. This procedure shows replacement of the M116A2 axle.
a.
REMOVAL
1.
Block and support frame securely, front and rear.
5-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
5-1.
AXLE REPLACEMENT (continued).
2.
Place floor jack under midpoint of axle (1) to provide a balanced support.
3.
At each end of axle (1), remove four self-locking nuts (2) and washers (3), two U-bolts (4), and bumper (5) from
spring assembly (6) and spring plate (7). Discard self-locking nuts.
4.
Remove axle (1) from under trailer and from floor jack.
b.
INSTALLATION
1.
Place midpoint of axle (1) on floor jack and position axle (1) under trailer.
2.
Raise axle (1) until it contacts underside of spring assembly (6). At each end of axle (1), engage spring assembly
center bolt head (8) with hole in pad on bumper (5).
3.
Install bumper (5) on each spring assembly (6).
4.
At each end of axle (1), install two U-bolts (4) into grooves of bumper (5) and through holes in spring plate (7).
5.
At each end of axle (1), install four washers (3) and new self-locking nuts (2) on two U-bolts (4).
6.
Remove floor jack from under axle (1).
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
Install service brakes (para 4-34).
Install hydraulic brake lines on axle (para 4-39).
Install shock absorbers (para 4-54).
5-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. BRAKEDRUM AND TIRE MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-2.
General.......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Brakedrum Repair ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Tire Repair..................................................................................................................................... 5-5
GENERAL.
The section describes and illustrates repair procedures for the brakedrum and tire.
5-3.
BRAKEDRUM REPAIR.
This Task Covers:

a.
Inspection
b. Repair
Initial Setup:
Field maintenance tool set
(Item 5, Appendix B)
a.
Page
Number
Materials/Parts:
INSPECTION
WARNING
properly cleaned. Asbestos dust, which can be dangerous if you touch it or breathe it,
may be on these components. Wear an approved filter mask and gloves. NEVER use
compressed air or a dry brush to clean brake components. Dust may be removed using an
industrial-type vacuum cleaner. Clean dust or mud away from brake components with
water and a wet, soft brush or cloth. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
illness or death to personnel.
gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes,
and DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open flame or excessive heat.
5-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
5-3.
BRAKEDRUM REPAIR (continued).
1.
Clean brakedrum (1) with drycleaning solvent and allow to dry.
2.
Inspect stud holes (2) for cracks (3). Discard brakedrum (1) if stud holes are cracked.
WARNING
DO NOT use a brakedrum that exceeds maximum wear specifications. Failure to follow this warning may
result in brake failure and serious injury or death to personnel.
3.
Measure inside diameter of brakedrum (1). Discard and replace brakedrum (1) if inside diameter exceeds 12.065
inches (30.645 cm).
4.
Inspect braking surface (4) for cracks (3), hot spots (5), and scoring (6). Reface braking surface if damaged
(subpara b).
5.
Inspect braking surface (4) for out-of-round at 45-degree intervals. Out-of-round should not exceed 0.015 inch
(0.381 mm). If runout exceeds 0.015 inch (0.381 mm), reface braking surface (subpara b).
5-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
5-3.
BRAKEDRUM REPAIR (continued).
b.
REPAIR
1.
Reface braking surface (4) with brakedrum lathe, removing a maximum of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) per cut.
WARNING
DO NOT use a brakedrum that exceeds maximum wear specifications. Failure to follow this
warning may result in brake failure and serious injury or death to personnel.
2.
Discard and replace brakedrum (1) if inside diameter exceeds 12.065 inches (30.645 cm) after refacing.
FOLLOW-ON TASKS:
None
5-4.
TIRE REPAIR.
Refer to TM 9-2610-200-14 for instructions on tire repair.
5-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section III. FRAME ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE
5-5.
FRAME ASSEMBLY REPAIR.
Refer to TB 9-2300-247-40 for instructions on frame assembly repair.
5-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section IV. ACCESSORY ITEMS MAINTENANCE
5-6.
CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLY REPAIR (M101A2 AND M101A3).
Refer to FM 10-16 for instructions on canvas cover assembly repair.
5-7/(5-8 blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
Paragraph
Number
Paragraph Title
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-1.
Page
Number
General.......................................................................................................................................... A-1
Forms ............................................................................................................................................ A-1
Field Manuals ................................................................................................................................ A-1
Technical Manuals ........................................................................................................................ A-2
Pamphlets and Bulletins................................................................................................................ A-2
Other Publications ......................................................................................................................... A-3
GENERAL.
This appendix lists all forms, manuals, pamphlets, bulletins, and other publications that are referenced in this manual
and/or apply to the operation and maintenance of the M101 and M116 Series trailers. DA Pam 25-30, Consolidated Index
of Army Publications and Blank Forms, should be consulted frequently for the latest changes or revisions and for new
publications relevant to material covered in this technical manual.
A-2.
FORMS.
Refer to DA Pam 738-750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS), for instructions on the use of
maintenance forms.
Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.....................................................DA Form 2028
Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical Publications .......................................... DA Form 2028-2
Organization Control Record for Equipment ............................................................................DA Form 2401
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet................................................................DA Form 2404
Maintenance Request ..............................................................................................................DA Form 2407
Equipment Log Assembly (Records)........................................................................................DA Form 2408
Equipment Control Record ................................................................................................... DA Form 2408-9
Serial/Registration Number Record...................................................................................... DA Form 3328-1
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record ........................................................................ DD Form 314
Processing and Deprocessing Record for Shipment, Storage and
Issue of Vehicles and Spare Engines ............................................................................... DD Form 1397
Report of Discrepancy (ROD) .................................................................................................... SF Form 364
Product Quality Deficiency Report.............................................................................................. SF Form 368
A-3.
FIELD MANUALS.
NBC Contamination Avoidance............................................................................................................FM 3-3
NBC Protection.....................................................................................................................................FM 3-4
NBC Decontamination..........................................................................................................................FM 3-5
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel
in Cold Weather (O Degrees F to Minus 65 Degrees F) ...........................................................FM 9-207
A-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
A-3.
FIELD MANUALS (continued).

General Fabric Repair ......................................................................................................................FM 10-16
Camouflage ........................................................................................................................................FM 20-3
First Aid for Soldiers .........................................................................................................................FM 21-11
Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver..........................................................................................FM 21-305
Basic Cold Weather Manual.............................................................................................................FM 31-70
Northern Operations.........................................................................................................................FM 31-71
Railway Operating and Safety Rules................................................................................................FM 55-21
Army Motor Transport Units and Operations ...................................................................................FM 55-30
Desert Operations (How To Fight) .....................................................................................................FM 90-3
Mountain Operations ..........................................................................................................................FM 90-6
A-4.
TECHNICAL MANUALS.
Inspection, Care and Maintenance of Antifriction Bearings..............................................................TM 9-214
Operators Manual for Welding Theory and Application...................................................................TM 9-237
Deepwater Fording of Ordnance Materiel ........................................................................................TM 9-238
Materials Used for Cleaning, Preserving, Abrading and Cementing
Ordnance Materiel and Related Materials, Including Chemicals ...............................................TM 9-247
Operators, Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual
for Care, Maintenance Repair and Inspection of Pneumatic
Tires and Inner Tubes ....................................................................................................... TM 9-2610-200-14
Painting Instructions for Army Materiel.........................................................................................TM 43-0139
Railcar Loading Procedures ...........................................................................................................TM 55-601
Storage and Materials Handling ............................................................................................... TM 743-200-1
Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment
to Prevent Enemy Use....................................................................................................... TM 750-244-6
A-5.
PAMPHLETS AND BULLETINS.

Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms ................................................... DA Pam 25-30
Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures) ................................................................. DA Pam 710-2-1
The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS).................................................... DA Pam 738-750
Storage and Serviceability Standard: Tracked Vehicles, Wheeled
Vehicles, and Component Parts.................................................................................................. SB 740-98-1
Description, Use, Bonding Techniques, and Properties of Adhesive....................................... TB ORD 1032
Tactical Wheeled Vehicles: Repair of Frames ...................................................................TB 9-2300-247-40
Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest
(U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command).
Tank and Automotive Equipment...........................................................................TB 43-0001-39 Series
Color, Marking, and Camouflage Painting of Military Vehicles,
Construction Equipment and Materials Handling Equipment ................................................ TB 43-0209
Maintenance in the Desert ........................................................................................................... TB 43-0239
A-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
A-6.
OTHER PUBLICATIONS.
Environmental Protection and Enhancement................................................................................... AR 200-1
Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability............................................................................... AR 700-138
Reporting of Product Quality Deficiencies Across Component Lines . ............................................ AR 702-7
Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items ..................................................................CTA 8-100
Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V,
Repair Parts and Heraldic Items)...........................................................................................CTA 50-970
Abbreviations for Use on Drawings, Specifications, Standards, and
in Technical Documents ....................................................................................................... MIL-STD-12
A-3/(A-4 blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX B
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
Section I. INTRODUCTION
Paragraph
Number
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-1.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General.......................................................................................................................................... B-1
Maintenance Functions ................................................................................................................. B-1
Explanation of Columns in Section II, Maintenance Allocation Chart
for M101 and M116 Series Trailers ............................................................................................... B-2
Explanation of Columns in Section III, Tool and Test Equipment Requirements.......................... B-3
Explanation of Columns in Section IV, Remarks........................................................................... B-3
GENERAL.
Appendix B consists of four sections:

a.
Section I provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the various
maintenance levels.
b.
Section II, the maintenance allocation chart (MAC), designates overall authority and responsibility for the
performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the
maintenance functions to the end item or component will be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the
designated maintenance levels.
c.
Section III lists the tools and test equipment (both special tools and common tool sets) required for each
maintenance function as referenced from Section II
d.
Section IV contains supplemental instructions and explanatory notes for some maintenance functions.
B-2.
MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS.
Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows:

a.
Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or electrical
characteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or feel).
b.
Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical characteristics of an
item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards.
c.
Service. To keep an item in proper operating condition by periodically cleaning (including decontaminating, when
required), preserving, draining, painting, or replenishing fuel, lubricants, chemical fluids, or gases.
d.
Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper or exact position or by setting the
operating characteristics to specified parameters.
e.
Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.
B-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
B-2.
MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS (continued).
f.
Calibrate. To determine the accuracy of and cause corrections or adjustments to be made on instruments or test,
measuring, and diagnostic equipment (TMDE) used in precision measurement. Calibration consists of
comparisons of two instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any
discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared.
9.
Remove/install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance
functions "Install" may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, repair part, or module
(component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system.
h.
Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and Install a serviceable counterpart in its place. "Replace" is
authorized by the MAC and is shown as the third position of the source, maintenance, and recoverability (SMR)
code.
i.
Repair. To apply maintenance services--including fault location/troubleshooting, removal/installation, and

disassembly/assembly procedures--and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an
item by correcting any specific damage. fault, malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly, module (component
or assembly), end Item. or system.
j.
Overhaul. To perform that maintenance effort (service/action) required to restore an item to a completely
serviceable/operational condition as required by maintenance standards in an appropriate technical publication
(e.g., depot maintenance work requirement). Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed
by the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an item to like-new condition.
k.
Rebuild. To perform those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a likenew condition In accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel
maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age
measurements (hours,/miles, etc.) considered in classifying Army equipment/components.
B-3.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN SECTION II, MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR M101 AND M116 SERIES TRAILERS.
a.
(1) Group Number. Column 1 lists functional group code numbers, whose purpose is to identify maintenance
significant components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the next higher assembly. The end item
group number is "00."
b.
(2) Component/Assembly. Column 2 contains the names of components, assemblies, subassemblies, and
modules for which maintenance is authorized.
c.
(3) Maintenance Function. Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in Column 2. (For a
detailed explanation of these functions, refer to para B-2.)
d.
(4) Maintenance Level. Column 4 specifies, by the listing of a work-time figure in the appropriate subcolumn(s),
the level of maintenance authorized to perform the function listed in Column 3. This figure represents the active
time required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or
complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels, appropriate
work-time figures will be shown for each level. The work-time figure represents the average time required to
restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item, or system) to a serviceable condition
under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time (including
B-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
B-3.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN SECTION II, MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR M101 AND M116 SERIES TRAILERS (continued).
any necessary disassembly/assembly time), troubleshooting/fault location time, and quality assurance/ quality control time
in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the
MAC. The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as follows:
C........................ Operator/Crew
O........................ Unit
F ........................ Direct Support
H........................ General Support
D........................ Depot
e.
(5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code.Column 5 specifies, by code, those common tool sets (not individual
tools), common TMDE, special tools, special TMDE, and special support equipment required to perform the
designated maintenance function. Codes are keyed to tools and test equipment listed in Section Ill.
f.
(6) Remarks. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetical order, which is keyed to
remarks contained in Section IV. If there is nothing in the Remarks column, there is no Section IV.
B-4.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN SECTION III, TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT

REQUIREMENTS.
a.
Column 1, Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. This code correlates with the code used in Section II,
Column 5.
b.
Column 2, Maintenance Level. The symbol designation shown indicates the lowest level of maintenance
authorized to use the tool or test equipment.
c.
Column 3, Nomenclature. This is the name or identification of the tool or test equipment.
d.
Column 4, National Stock Number. This is the national stock number of the tool or test equipment.
e.
Column 5, Tool Number. This is the manufacturers part number.
B-5.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN SECTION IV, REMARKS.
a.
Column 1, Remarks Code. This column contains the code letter recorded in Column 6 of Section II, the MAC.
b.
Column 2, Remarks. This column provides information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as
indicated in Section II, the MAC.
B-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR M101 AND M116 SERIES TRAILERS
06
0609
0613
11
1100
12
1201
1202
1204
B-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION
CHARTFOR
M101ANDM116SERIESTRAILERS(continued)
(2)
(1)
Group
Number
Component/Assembly
13
WHEEL AND TRACKS
1311
(4)
Maintenance C
Function
Maintenance
Level
O
F
H
D
(5)
Toolsand
Test
Equipment
Ref. Code
(6)
Remarks
Wheel Assembly
Brakedrum
1313
(3)
Inspect
Replace
Repair
0.5
1.0
Hub Bearings, Wheel
Service
Adjust
Replace
1.0
0.2
1.0
1,2
1,2
1,2
Wheel
Inspect
Replace
0.1
2.0
1,2
Inspect
Replace
Repair
0.1
2.0
1,2
5
Tires, Tubes, Tire Chains

Ti re
Tube, Inner
1.0
1,2
1,5
1,2
1,2
4.0
1,2,5,6,7
2.0
1,2
1,2,5,6,7
2.0
Replace
Repair
1.0
1.0
Repair
1.0
Replace
Repair
1.5
Bracket Assembly,
Drawbar
Replace
3.0
1,2
Chains, Safety
Replace
0.5
1,2
15
FRAME, TOWING
ATTACHMENTS,
DRAWBARS, AND
ARTICULATION
SYSTEMS
1501
Frame Assembly
1503
Pintles and Towing

Attachments
Drawbar
B-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&PP
MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION
CHARTFOR
M101ANDM116SERIESTRAILERS(continued)
(2)
(1)
Group
Number
Component/Assembly
Maintenance C
Function
Maintenance
Level
O
F
H
D
(5)
Toolsand
Test
Equipment
Ref. Code
Landing Gear, Leveling

Jacks
1507
Leg, Support, Front,

(Adjustable)
16
SPRINGS AND SHOCK

ABSORBERS
1601
Springs
1604
Shock Absorber
Equipment
Absorber, Shock
18
Replace
Service
2.0
0.5
1,2
1,2
Replace
2.0
1,2
Replace
1.0
1,2
Replace
4.0
1,2
Replace
Repair
0.5
Replace
0.5
Replace
1.0
Replace
Repair
1.0
0.5
BODY, CAB, HOOD,

AND HULL
1810
Cargo Body
BODY, CHASSIS, AND
HULL ACCESSORY
ITEMS
22
2201
Canvas, Rubber, or
Plastic Items
Cover Assembly, Canvas
2202
1.0
1,5
Accessory Items
Reflector
2210
33
3307
1,2,3,4
SPECIAL PURPOSE KIT

Special Purpose Kit
Stabilizer Kit, Rear
Change
Data Plates and

Instruction Holders
Plate, Identification
B-6
(4)
(3)
1
1
(6)
Remarks
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
(1)
(2 )
(3)
(4)
(5)
TOOL OR TEST
EQUIPMENT
REF CODE
MAINTENANCE
LEVEL
NOMENCLATURE
NATIONAL STOCK
NUMBER
TOOL
NUMBER
Tool Kit, General Mechanics: Automotive
5180-00-177-7033
Shop Equipment, Automotive Maintenance

and Repair: Organizational Maintenance,
Common No. 1, Less Power
4910-00-754-0654
5110-00-289-0003
6
7
F
F
Die Set, Metal Stamping, Hand:

With 1/4-In. Numbers
Die Set, Metal Stamping, Hand: With 1/4-In.
Upper Case Letters, Ampersand, and Period
Shop Equipment, Automotive Maintenance
and Repair: Field Maintenance, Basic,
Less Power
Shop Equipment, Welding, Field Maintenance
Tool Kit, Welders
5110-00-289-0007
4910-00-754-0705
3470-00-357-7268
5810-00-754-0661
Section IV. REMARKS
(1)
Remarks Code
(2)
Remarks
Stoplight-taillight and composite stoplight-taillight repair is limited to lens, preformed

packing, and lamp or LED replacement.
Refer to TM 9-2610-200-14 for information on tire and tube repair.
Refer to TB 9-2300-247-40 for information on frame repair.
B-7/(B-8 blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX C
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS
The M101 and M1 16 Series trailers currently do not have any assigned components of end item or basic issue items.
C-1/(C-2 blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX D
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Paragraph
Number
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-1.
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
Scope ................................................................................................................................... D-1

General ................................................................................................................................ D-1
Explanation of Columns ...................................................................................................... D-1
SCOPE
This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for support of the M101 and M116 Series trailers.
D-2.
GENERAL.
This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the trailers and do not have to be turned in with them. These items
are all authorized to you by CTA or MTOE.
D-3.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.
a.
In Section II (Additional Authorization List), the national stock number, description, Commercial and
Government Entity Code (CAGEC) and part number, unit of measure (U/M), and quantity recommended
(Qty. Recm.) are provided for each item to help you identify and request the items you need to support this
equipment.
b.
The items are listed in alphabetical sequence by item name under the type of document (CTA or MTOE) that
authorizes the item(s) to you.
c.
If the item required differs for different models of this equipment, see the "Used-On Code" entries for the
applicable model. These codes are as follows:
Used-On Code
Model
263
TC1
258
SPR
CT1
M101A2
M101A3
M116A2
M116A2E1
M116A3
D-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (AAL)
(1)
NATIONAL STOCK
NUMBER
(2)
Description CAGEC and Part Number
(3)
USABLE ON
CODE
U/M
(4)
QTY
AUTH
CTA Authorized Items

2540-00-133-3492
Bow and Tarpaulin Accessory Kit, Vehicle Body:

Includes 5 Bows and Tarpaulin Cover Assembly,
Green (19207)11674804
263, CT1
EA
Bow and Tarpaulin Accessory Kit, Vehicle Body:

Includes 5 Bows and Tarpaulin Cover Assembly,
Tan (19207)11674804-1
263, CT1
EA
EA
MTOE Authorized Items

5120-00-243-2419
5120-00-293-2452
5120-01-156-7296
Bar, Socket Wrench Handle: 3/4-Inch Diameter,

30 Inches Long
(19207) 6196147
Wrench, Double Socket, Hexagon:
1 1/2 and 1 1/16-Inch Openings, 10 Inches Long
(19207) 7083293
263
EA
Wrench, Wheel Lug: CUCV

(11862)14009303
263
EA
D-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX E
REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST
Paragraph
Number
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
E-5
E-6
E-7
E-1.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
Scope ................................................................................................................................... E-1

General................................................................................................................................. E-1
Explanation of Columns (Sections II and III) ........................................................................ E-2
Explanation of Columns (Section IV) ................................................................................... E-6
Special Information............................................................................................................... E-7
How To Locate Repair Parts ................................................................................................ E-7
Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................... E-7
SCOPE.
This repair parts and special tools list (RPSTL) lists and authorizes spares and repair parts; special tools; special test,
measurement, and diagnostic equipment (TMDE); and other special support equipment required for the performance of
Unit, Direct Support, and General Support maintenance of the M101 and M116 Series trailers. It authorizes the
requisitioning, issue, and disposition of spares, repair parts, and special tools as indicated by the source, maintenance,
and recoverability (SMR) code.
E-2.
GENERAL.
In addition to Section I, this RPSTL is divided into the following sections:

a.
Section II. Repair Parts List. A list of spares and repair parts authorized by this RPSTL for use in the
performance of maintenance. The list also includes parts that must be removed for replacement of the
authorized parts. Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending alphanumeric sequence, with
the parts in each group listed in ascending figure and item number sequence. Bulk materials are listed in
item name sequence. Repair parts kits are listed separately in their own functional group within Section II.
Repair parts for repairable special tools are also listed in this section. Items listed are shown on the
associated illustration(s)/figure(s).
b.
Section III. Special Tools List. A list of special tools, special TMDE, and other special support equipment
authorized by this RPSTL for the performance of maintenance.
c.
Section IV. Cross Reference Indexes. A list, in national item identification number (NIIN) sequence, of all
national stock numbered items appearing in the listing, followed by a list in alphanumeric sequence of all part
numbers appearing in the listings. National stock numbers (NSNs) and part numbers are cross-referenced to
each illustration/figure and item number appearance. The figure and item number index lists each figure and
item number in alphanumeric sequence and cross-references the NSN, commercial and government entity
code (CAGEC), and part number.
E-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-3.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS (SECTIONS II AND III).

a.
ITEM NO. [Column (1)]. Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration.
b.
SMR CODE [Column (2)]. The SMR code is a five-position code containing supply/requisitioning
information, maintenance category authorization criteria, and disposition instruction, as shown in the following
breakout:
*
Complete Repair Maintenance capacity, capability, and authority to perform all corrective maintenance tasks of the
Repair function in a use/user environment In order to restore serviceability to a failed Item.
(1) Source Code. The source code tells you how to get an item needed for maintenance, repair, or
overhaul of an end item/equipment. Explanations of source codes follow:
Code
Application/Explanation
Stocked items; use the applicable NSN to request/requisition
items with these source codes. They are authorized to the
category indicated by the code entered in the third position
of the SMR code.
"Items coded PC are subject to deterioration.

......................................................................................................................
Items with these codes are not to be requested/requisitioned individually. They

are part of a kit that is authorized to the maintenance category indicated in the
third position of the SMR code. The complete kit must be requisitioned and
applied.
.................................................................................................................................
Items with these codes are not to be requested/requisitioned individually. They
must be made from bulk material that is identified by the part number in the
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE-ON CODE (UOC) column and listed in the bulk
material group of the repair parts list in this RPSTL. If the item is authorized to
you by the third-position code of the SMR code but the source code indicates it is
made at a higher level, order the item from the higher level of maintenance.
E-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-3.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS (SECTIONS II AND III) (continued).

Items with these codes are not to be requested/requisitioned
individually. The parts that make up the assembled item must be
requisitioned or fabricated and assembled at the level of
maintenance indicated by the source code. If the third position
code of the SMR code authorizes you to replace the item, but the
source code indicates that the item is assembled at a higher level,
order the item from the higher level of maintenance.
NOTE
Cannibalization or controlled exchange, when authorized, may be used as a source of
supply for items with the preceding source codes, except for those source coded "XA."
XA XB XC XD -
DO NOT requisition an "XA"-coded item. Order its next higher assembly.

If an "XB" item is not available from salvage, order it using the CAGEC and part number given.
Installation drawing, diagram, instruction sheet, or field service drawing that is identified by manufacturers part
number.
Item is not stocked. Order an "XD"-coded item through normal supply channels using the CAGEC and part
number given if no NSN is available.
(2) Maintenance Code. Maintenance codes tell you the level(s) of maintenance authorized to use and
repair support items. The maintenance codes are entered in the third and fourth positions of the SMR code as follows:
(a) The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest maintenance level
authorized to remove, replace, and use an item. The maintenance code entered in the third
position will indicate authorization to one of the following levels of maintenance:
Code
Crew or operator maintenance done within Unit maintenance or Aviation Unit

maintenance.
Unit maintenance or Aviation Unit can remove, replace, and use the item.
Direct Support or Aviation Intermediate level can remove, replace, and use the
item.
General Support level can remove, replace, and use the item.
Specialized repair activity (SRA) can remove, replace, and use the item.
Depot level can remove, replace, and use the item.
E-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-3.

NOTE
If authorized by the maintenance allocation chart (MAC) and SMR codes, some limited
repair may be done on an item at a lower level of maintenance.
(b) The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells whether the item is to be repaired and
identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete repair (i.e., perform all
authorized "Repair" functions). This position will contain one of the following maintenance codes:
Code
O
F
H
L
D
Z
B
Unit maintenance or Aviation Unit is the lowest level that can do complete repair
of the item.
Direct Support or Aviation Intermediate is the lowest level than can do complete
repair of the item.
General Support is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
SRA is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
Depot is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item.
Nonrepairable. No repair is authorized.
No repair is authorized. (No parts or special tools are authorized for the
maintenance of a "B"-coded item.) However, the item may be reconditioned by
adjusting, lubricating, etc., at the user level.
(3) Recoverability Code. Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on
unserviceable items. The recoverability code is entered in the fifth position of the SMR code as follows:
Code
Z
O
F
H
D
L
A
Nonrepairable item. When unserviceable, condemn and dispose of the item at
the level of maintenance shown in the third position of the SMR code.
Repairable item. When uneconomically repairable, condemn and dispose of the
item at Unit maintenance or Aviation Unit level.
item at the Direct Support or Aviation Intermediate level.
item at the General Support level.
Repairable item. When beyond lower-level repair capability, return to Depot.
Condemnation and disposal of the item is not authorized below Depot level.
Repairable item. Condemnation and disposal of the item is not authorized below
SRA.
Item requires special handling or condemnation procedures for specific reasons
(e.g., precious metal content, high dollar value, critical material, or hazardous
material). Refer to appropriate manuals/directives for specific instructions.
E-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-3.

c.
CAGEC [Column (3)]. The CAGEC is a five-digit alphanumeric code used to identify the manufacturer,
distributor, or Government agency, etc., that supplies the item.
NOTE
When you use an NSN to requisition an item, the item you receive may have a part
number different from the part ordered.
d.
PART NUMBER [COLUMN (4)]. Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual,
company, firm, corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item
by means of its engineering drawings, specifications standards, and inspection requirements, to identify an
item or range of items.
e.
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE-ON CODE (UOC) [Column (5)].

information:
This column includes the following
(1) The Federal item name and, when required, a minimum description to identify the item.
(2) Physical security classification. Not applicable.
(3) Items that are included in kits and sets are listed below the name of the kit or set on Figure KIT.
(4) Spare/repair parts that make up an assembled item are listed immediately following the assembled item
line entry.
(5) Part numbers for bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line item entry for the item to be
manufactured/fabricated.
(6) When the item is not used with all serial numbers of the same model, the effective serial numbers are
shown on the last line(s) of the description (before UOC).
(7) The UOC, when applicable (see para E-5, Special Information).
(8) In the Special Tools List section, the Basis of Issue (BOI) appears as the last line(s) in the entry for each
special tool, special TMDE, and other special support equipment. When density of equipments
supported exceeds density spread indicated in the BOI, the total authorization is increased
proportionately.
(9) The statement "END OF FIGURE" appears just below the last item description in Column 5 for a given
figure in both Section II and Section III.
f.
QTY [Column (6)]. The QTY (quantity per figure) column indicates the quantity of the item used in the
breakout shown on the illustration/figure, which is prepared for a functional group, subfunctional group, or an
assembly. A "V" appearing in this column in lieu of a quantity indicates that the quantity is variable and the
quantity may vary from application to application.
a.
National Stock Number (NSN) Index.

(1) STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN by NIIN sequence. The NIIN consists of the last
nine digits of the NSN (i.e.,
NSN
5305-01-674-1467). When using this column to locate an item, ignore the first four digits
NIIN
of the NSN. However, the complete NSN should be used when ordering items by stock number.
E-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-4.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS (SECTION IV).

(2) FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located. The
figures are in numerical order in Section II and Section III.
(3) ITEM Column. The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent FIG.
column. This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line.
b.
Part Number Index. Part numbers in this index are listed by part number in ascending alphanumeric
sequence (i.e., vertical arrangement of letter and number combination that places the first letter or digit of
each group in order A through Z, followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following letter or digit in like
order).
(1) CAGEC Column. The CAGEC is a five-digit alphanumeric code used to identify the manufacturer,
(2) PARTNUMBER Column. Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, firm,
corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means
of its engineering drawings, specifications standards, and inspection requirements, to identify an item or
range of items.
(3) STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN for the associated part number and
manufacturer identified in the PART NUMBER and CAGEC columns to the left.
(4) FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located in Section
II and Section III.
(5) ITEM Column. The item number is that number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure
referenced in the adjacent figure number column.
c.
Figure and Item Number Index.

(1) FIG. Column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located in Sections
II and III.
(2) ITEM Column. The item number is that number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure
referenced in the adjacent figure number column.
(3) STOCK NUMBER Column. This column lists the NSN for the item.
(4) CAGEC Column. The CAGEC is a five-digit alphanumeric code used to identify the manufacturer,
(5) PART NUMBER Column. Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, firm,
corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means
of its engineering drawings, specifications standards, and inspection requirements, to identify an item or
range of items.
E-5.
SPECIAL INFORMATION.
a.
Usable-On Code. Usable-on codes are shown as "UOC:" in the Description column on the first line after the
applicable item description/nomenclature. Uncoded items are applicable to all models. Identification of the
usable-on codes used in the RPSTL are as follows:
E-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
E-5.
SPECIAL INFORMATION (continued).

263
TC1
258
SPR
CT1
E-6.
M101A2
M101A3
M116A2
M116A2E1
M116A3
b.
Fabrication Instructions. Bulk materials required to manufacture items are listed in the Bulk Material
Functional Group of this RPSTL. Part numbers for bulk material are also referenced in the DESCRIPTION
column of the line item entry for the item to be manufactured/fabricated. Detailed fabrication instructions for
items source coded to be manufactured or fabricated are found in Appendix G of this manual.
c.
Assembly Instructions. Detailed assembly instructions for items source coded to be assembled from
component spare/repair parts are found in Chapters 4 and 5. Items that make up the assembly are listed
immediately following the assembly item entry, or reference is made to an applicable figure.
d.
Kits. Line item entries for repair parts kits appear in group 9401 in Section II.
e.
Index Numbers. Items that have the work BULK in the FIG. column will have an index number shown in the
item column. This index number is a cross-reference between the NSN/part number index and the bulk
materials list in Section II.
f.
Associated Publications. Not applicable.
HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS.

a.
When National Stock Number or Part Number Is Not Known:

(1) First. Using the Table of Contents, determine the assembly group or subassembly group to which the
item belongs. This is necessary because figures are prepared for assembly groups and subassembly
groups, and listings are divided into the same groups.
(2) Second. Find the figure covering the assembly group or subassembly group to which the item belongs.
(3) Third. Identify the item on the figure and use the Figure and Item Number Index to find the NSN.
b.
When National Stock Number or Part Number Is Known:

(1) First. Using the National Stock Number Index or Part Number Index, find the pertinent NSN or part
number. The National Stock Number Index is in NIIN sequence (see para E-4a[1]). The part numbers
in the Part Number Index are listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence (see para E-4b). Both indexes
cross-reference you to the illustration/figure and item number of the item you are looking for.
(2) Second. Turn to the figure and item number, verify that the item is the one youre looking for, then locate
the item number in the repair parts list for the figure.
E-7.
ABBREVIATIONS.
For standard abbreviations see MIL-STD-12, Military Standard Abbreviations for Use on Drawings, Specifications,
Standards, and in Technical Documents.
E-7
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 1. Composite Stoplight-Taillight
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

GROUP 0609 LIGHTS
FIG. 1 COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT
1
PAOZZ 6220013723883
19207
12375837
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
9
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
XAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
6220012932627
6220012973217
6240000190877
6240001558717
19207
19207
96906
96906
80204
19207
19207
19207
96906
81348
12375841
11639519-2
MS45904-76
MS35338-46
B1821BH038C088N
12375838
12360870-1
12360870-2
MS15570-1251
W-L-00111/60
10
11
11
PAOZZ 6220012842709
PAOZZ 6240000446914
PAOZZ 6240006170991
19207
96906
96906
12360850-1
MS35478-1683
MS35478-1073
12
12
PAOZZ 6240000193093
PAOZZ 6240001433159
96906
96906
MS15570-623
MS15570-89
6220013592870
5330004620907
5310000611258
5310006379541
5305011409118
TAILLIGHT, VEHICULAR COMPOSITE

MARKER ..............................................................
.LENS, LIGHT ......................................................
.PACKING, PREFORMED ...................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ...............................
.BODY ASSEMBLY ..............................................
.STOP LIGHT, VEHICULA............................. 12V
.STOP LIGHT, VEHICULA............................. 24V
.LAMP, INCANDESCENT .............................. 24V
UOC:CT1, 258, 263
.LIGHT, MARKER, CLEARA.......................... 24V
UOC:CT1, SPR, 258, 263
UOC:CT1, SPR, 258, 263
END OF FIGURE
1-1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 2. Chassis Wiring Harness ( Composite Stoplight-Taillight)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 0613 HULL OR CHASSIS WIRING

HARNESS
FIG. 2 CHASSIS WIRING HARNESS
(COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT)
1
1
PAOZZ 6150011671827
PAOZZ
19207
19207
11652180
WIRING HARNESS (USED ON VEHICLES W/

COMPOSITE STOPLIGHT-TAILLIGHT) ..............
UOC:258, 263
WIRING HARNESS, BRAN USED ON
VEHICLES W/COMPOSITE STOPLIGHTTAILLIGHT ...........................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
CLIP ASSEMBLY .................................................
UOC:258, 263
CLIP ASSEMBLY, CONNE ..................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
CLIP, SPRING TENSION ....................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
WIRING HARNESS, EXTE ..................................
SCREW, TAPPING ..............................................
UOC:258, 263
SCREW, MACHINE .............................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
UOC:258, 263
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
UOC:258, 263
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON .....................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
11652180-2
PAOZZ 5340000402364
19207
8347212
PAOZZ 2590008329976
19207
8722943
PAOZZ 5340008600555
19207
8722870
3
4
PAOZZ
PAOZZ 5305008813824
19207
19207
12441077
171591
PAOZZ 5305009846210
96906
MS35206-263
PAOZZ 5310002857037
96906
MS122031
PAOZZ 5310000453296
96906
MS35338-43
PAOZZ 5340000402365
19207
8347213
PAOZZ 5310009349758
96906
MS35649-202
END OF FIGURE
2-1
1
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
1
4
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 3. Intervehicular Cable
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY

HARNESS
FIG. 3 INTERVEHICULAR CABLE
1
PAOZZ 6150008306672
19207
8722865
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPEC INTERVEHICULAR ..

END OF FIGURE
3-1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 4. Wiring Harness and Intervehicular Cable Attachments
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY

HARNESS
FIG. 4 WIRING HARNESS AND
INTERVEHICULAR CABLE ATTACHMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
XBOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5305008550957
5310003952948
5305004324203
5975000742072
96906
96906
19207
96906
96906
MS24629-46
MS45904-64
7979250
MS51861-47
MS3367-1-9
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5325001850001
5305009846210
5310000453296
5340002827515
5310009349758
5340001777832
5340011321175
5310006379541
5305002693234
5340008600555
5975011703480
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
19207
19207
96906
96906
19207
19207
MS35489-46
MS35206-263
MS35338-43
MS21333-37
MS35649-202
8382973
7336030
MS35338-46
MS90727-58
8722870
10924576
SCREW, TAPPING ..............................................

WASHER, LOCK .................................................
CLAMP, LOOP .....................................................
SCREW, TAPPING ..............................................
STRAP, TIEDOWN, ELECT .................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
GROMMET, NONMETALLIC ...............................
SCREW, MACHINE .............................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
CLAMP, LOOP .....................................................
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON. ....................................
STRAP, RETAINING ............................................
CLAMP, LOOP .....................................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
COVER, JUNCTION BOX ....................................
END OF FIGURE
4-1
11
9
10
10
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 5. Rear Axle Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 11 REAR AXLE

GROUP 1100 REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
FIG. 5 REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
1
2
PAFZZ 2530011389385
PFFZZ 2530013904684
19207
19207
12313006
AXLE, VEHICULAR, NOND W/FLANGE AND

SPRING SEAT ASSEMBLY .................................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
AXLE, VEHICULAR, NOND OFFSET .................
UOC:CT1, TC1
12362791
END OF FIGURE
5-1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 6. Cable and Conduit Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 12 BRAKES
GROUP 1201 HANDBRAKES
FIG. 6 CABLE AND CONDUIT ASSEMBLY
1
PAOZZ 6150011687906
19207
11686101
PAOZZ 2530014298346
92867
15641500
CABLE AND CONDUIT A ....................................

UOC:CT1, SPR, 258, 263
CONTROL ASSEMBLY P/ ...................................
UOC:TC1
END OF FIGURE
6-1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 7. Handbrake Lever
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 1201 HANDBRAKES

FIG.7 HANDBRAKE LEVER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5310008071469
5365004758291
5340010704475
5305009580605
5306002259096
5305002692811
5340009365284
5310011392070
5310008101786
96906
19207
19207
96906
96906
96906
19207
19207
96906
MS21042-5
10926075
10926074
MS35207-298
MS90726-41
MS90726-67
10926073
10926094
MS21042-6
NUT, SELF-LOCKING, EX ...................................

SPACER, PLATE BRAKE CABLE ......................
STRAP, RETAINING BRAKE CABLE .................
SCREW, MACHINE .............................................
BOLT, MACHINE .................................................
LEVER, MANUAL CONTRO ................................
WASHER, FLAT ..................................................
NUT, SELF-LOCKING, EX ...................................
END OF FIGURE
7-1
5
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 8. Brake Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 1202 SERVICE BRAKES

FIG.8 BRAKE ASSEMBLY
1
PAOZZ 2530012876869
94489
18496
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5315010791494
5305002693236
5340010712098
5310006379541
5310007320559
5340010696705
3040008728567
5310008742922
5120010749323
2530012169259
14892
19207
96906
19207
96906
96906
19207
19207
19207
19207
19204
3202065
11686273
MS90727-60
11686276
MS35338-46
MS51968-8
11686262-1
11686262-2
11686280
11686281
11838714
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5360003840025
2530014307250
5305010709494
5360008772964
5360003840004
5340010686693
5360010880552
1005010839297
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
11686270
12448059
11686257
11686279
11686272
11686275
11686274
11686271
PLATE, BACKING, BRAKE LEFT OR

RIGHT HAND SIDE .............................................
PLATE, BACKING, BRAKE RIGHT ....................
PIN, TOGGLE, HEADED .....................................
COVER, ACCESS ................................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON .....................................
LEVER, LOCK-RELEASE ....................................
LEVER, MANUAL CONTRO ................................
WASHER, SPRING TENSI ..................................
CLAMP, BRAKE LINING ......................................
BRAKE SHOE SET SET CONTAINS 4
BRAKE SHOES ...................................................
SPRING, HELICAL, EXTE ...................................
STRUT PARKING BRAKE ...................................
SCREW, ADJUSTING .........................................
SPRING, HELICAL, COMP ..................................
SPRING, HELICAL, EXTE ...................................
RETAINER, HELICAL CO ....................................
SPRING, HELICAL, COMP ..................................
PLATE, SHOE GUIDE .........................................
END OF FIGURE
8-1
1
1
2
5
1
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 9. Wheel Cylinder
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
(6)
(UOC)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 1204 HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM

FIG. 9 WHEEL CYLINDER
1
1
2
3
4
5
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
2530001617576
2530001617575
2530011600850
5310005146674
5306002264822
2530005856079
19207
19207
14892
96906
80204
19207
11686267-1
11686267-2
049206
MS35335-34
B1821BH031C050N
11686277LINK,
CYLINDER LEFT .................................................

CYLINDER RIGHT...............................................
BLEEDER VALVE, HYDRA .................................
WASHER, LOCK .................................................
BOLT, MACHINE .................................................
WHEEL CYLINDER .............................................
END OF FIGURE
9-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 10. Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly (sheet 1 of 2)
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 10. Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly (sheet 2 of 2)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODES (UOC)
QTY

FIG. 10 HYDRAULIC BRAKE ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PAOOO
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5340013482989
19207
5310008775795
96906
2540010516355
93072
3120010521151
93072
2540010516354
93072
5305007104205
96906
5305007098423
96906
5365010536898 93072
11675013
MS21044N8
1808-1
1745
1829
MS90726-99
MS90727-97
1841
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
PAOZZ
XBOZZ
PAOZZ
PFOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
XAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PFOZZ
5310002756635
2530011671999
2510010507136
5305009496184
5305007098542
4710005111692
19207
19207
19207
19207
96906
96906
96906
01276
96906
93072
96906
93072
93072
93072
19207
19207
19207
19207
93072
93072
96906
96906
19207
5214539
12362746
5160323
8762000
MS90727-110
MS51922-21
MS51922-29
210104-8S
MS51968-14
10632
MS21083-C7
1840
1828
1804
12296386
12331722
12314088
12356020
10703
1844-2
MS51975-2
MS90727-91
8365426
32
PAOZZ
4730009083194
96906
MS35845-11
33
PAOZZ
4720004895350
96906
MS521301A204R
34
35
36
37
38
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
2530010508929
5330002916658
2590013882416
5340014189889
5330007373354
93072
63477
93072
02686
19207
10614
F6019
622794-X
126945
7373354
39
PAOZZ
4730007732163
63477
7979691
5310002091761
4730010538468
5305007195209
5310009591488
5310000577080
5310000034094
5310007320560
2540010607031
5310000742328
5310010508832
5360010542281
2530010507698
4010011586795
5340013859852
CATCH, CLAMPING HYDRAULIC BRAKE .....

. NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HE ............................
. LINK, CHAIN .................................................
. BEARING, SLEEVE . ...................................
. SHAFT, CHAIN .............................................
. SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ........................
. SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ........................
. SPACER, SLEEVE .......................................
UOC:258, 263
. WASHER, FLAT ...........................................
. CONNECTOR ...............................................
. WASHER, FLAT ...........................................
. BOLT, FLUID PASSAGE ..............................
SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ...........................
WASHER, LOCK .............................................
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON ..................................
. COUPLER, DRAWBAR, RIN .........................
. NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HE .............................
. WASHER, PUSH ROD ..................................
. SPRING .........................................................
. LEVER BREAKAWAY ....................................
CHAIN ASSEMBLY, SING ...............................
. SNAP HOOK ..................................................
. CHANNEL, STRUCTURAL ............................
. BOOT, MASTER CYL ....................................
. PUSH ROD, HYDRAULIC ..............................
. SHOCK ABSORBER, DIRE ...........................
. SCREW, SHOULDER SOCKET HEAD ........
. SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H .........................
TUBE ASSEMBLY, METAL ..............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
CLAMP, HOSE .................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
HOSE, NONMETALLIC ....................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, H ..............................
GASKET ...........................................................
CAP, FILLER OPENING ..................................
GASKET ...........................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
UOC:CT1, TC1
END OF FIGURE
10-1
1
8
4
8
4
1
3
4
1
1
1
1
4
3
2
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 11. Hydraulic Brake Lines
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY

FIG. 11 HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
AOOOO
19207
MOOZZ
19207
MOOZZ
19207
MOOZZ
19207
PAOZZ 5310001344141
PAOZZ 4730002788853
AOOOO
MOOZZ
21450
21450
19207
19207
PAOZZ 5310001344141
MOOZZ
MOOZZ
21450
19207
19207
11686100
12354224
11686100-56.5
12354224-1
110357
143449
11686102
12354225
10357
11686102-1X
12354225-1
8
9
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5340007782738
5305008550958
96906
96906
MS21333-2
MS24629-45
PAOZZ
5305008550958
96906
MS24629-45
10
11
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
4720013066294
5310001436102
19207
96906
12354199
MS51922-6
12
PAOZZ
5305002678953
96906
MS90727-5
13
PAOZZ
5340009936207
96906
MS21333-99
14
PAOZZ
5365008642993
19207
7735289
15
PAOZZ
5305008550964
96906
MS24629-48
16
AOOOO
19207
11686103-2
16
MOOZZ
19207
12362795
17
MOOZZ
19207
11686103-2-1X
TUBE ASSEMBLY FRONT, MAKE FROM

TUBE, P/N 10943231........................................
UOC:258, 263
TUBE ASSEMBLY MAKE FROM M3520B80AOOG .........................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
. TUBE, BENT METALLIC FRONT, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N 10943231 ............................
UOC:258, 263
. TUBE, BENT METALLIC FRONT, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N M3520-B80AOOG ...............
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
. NUT, SPECIAL. .............................................
COUPLING, TUBE ...........................................
. TUBE ASSEMBLY REAR, MAKE FROM TUBE,
P/N 10943231 ..................................................
UOC:258, 263
. TUBE ASSEMBLY MAKE FROM M3520B80AOOG ........................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
. NUT, SPECIAL ...............................................
. TUBE, BENT METALLIC REAR, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N 10943231 ............................
UOC:258, 263
. TUBE, BENT, METALLIC REAR, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N M3520-B80 AOOG ..............
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
CLAMP, LOOP .................................................
SCREW, TAPPING ..........................................
UOC:258, 263
SCREW, TAPPING ..........................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
HOSE ASSEMBLY, NONME ............................
NUT, SELF-LOCKING, HE ...............................
UOC:258, 263
UOC:258, 263
CLAMP, LOOP .................................................
UOC:258, 263
RING, RETAINING ...........................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
SCREW, TAPPING ..........................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
TUBE ASSEMBLY ...........................................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
TUBE ASSEMBLY MAKE FROM M3520B80AOOG ........................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. TUBE, BENT, METALLIC RIGHT, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N 10943231 ............................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
11-1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
13
13
11
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
23
24
25
26
MOOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
AOOOO
19207
5310001344141
5305002253843
5310008094058
4730010433055
MOOZZ
21450
80204
96906
19207
19207
19207
MOOZZ
19207
MOOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
(4)
PART
NUMBER
19207
5310001344141
5310005825965
5330010441941
21450
96906
19207
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
. TUBE, BENT, METALLIC RIGHT, MAKE

UOC:CT1, TC1
110357
. NUT, SPECIAL ...............................................
B1821BH025C100N SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ...........................
MS27183-10
WASHER, FLAT ..............................................
11625496
TEE, TUBE .......................................................
11686103-1
TUBE ASSEMBLY LEFT, MAKE FROM TUBE,
P/N 10943231 ..................................................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
12362796
TUBE ASSEMBLY MAKE FROM M3520B80AOOG ........................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
11686103-1-Lx
. TUBE, BENT, METALLIC LEFT, MAKE
FROM TUBE P/N 10943231 ............................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
12362796-1
. TUBE, BENT, METALLIC LEFT, MAKE
UOC:CT1, TC1
110357
. NUT, SPECIAL ...............................................
MS35338-44
WASHER, LOCK .............................................
11625497
GASKET ...........................................................
QTY
12362795-1
END OF FIGURE
11-2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 12. Wheel and Hub Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 13 WHEELS AND TRACKS

GROUP 1311 WHEEL ASSEMBLY
FIG. 12 WHEEL AND HUB ASSEMBLY
1
PAOZZ
2530011546952
11862
14035374
2
3
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
3040011495061
5315000137238
19207
96906
12313048
MS24665-425
PAOZZ
5315002368368
96906
MS24665-436
PAOZZ
5340011514202
19207
12441093
PAOZA
5310008166352
96906
MS27111-10
PAOZA
5310008166352
96906
MS27111-10
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOFF
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
3110011654860
5330011408231
3110001005303
5306012376844
3040011399900
2530011487074
5305009585258
5310011490868
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
96906
19207
12313045
12313027
12313046
12354223
12313010
12313012
MS35190-317
12313047
WHEEL, PNEUMATIC TIR ..............................

UOC:SPR, 258, 263
CAP, GREASE .................................................
PIN, COTTER ..................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
PIN, COTTER ..................................................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
NUT, CASTELLATED ......................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
WASHER, KEY ................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
WASHER, KEY ................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1, 263
BEARING, ROLLER, TAPE .............................
SEAL, PLAIN ENCASED .............................. .
BEARING, ROLLER, TAPE .............................
BOLT, RIBBED SHOULDE ..............................
HUB, BODY .....................................................
BRAKE DRUM .................................................
SCREW, MACHINE .........................................
END OF FIGURE
12-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
2
8
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 13. Wheel and Runflat Assembly (M101A3 and M116A3)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 1311 WHEEL ASSEMBLY

FIG. 13 WHEEL AND RUNFLAT ASSEMBLY
(M101A3 AND M116A3)
1
AOOOO
19207
12342641
PAOOO 2530013365740
19207
12342642
PAOZZ
5306013367175
19207
12342758
PAOZZ
5330013358878
19207
12342633
PAOZZ
2640013349453
19207
12342638
PAOZZ
2530013382730
34623
12342639
PAOZZ
2530013363127
19207
12342640
PAOZZ
5310011987585
19207
12339501
PAOZZ
2640010982029
81348
TYIV/CL1/TRVC8
10
PAOZZ
2640000501229
81348
TYV/CL2/TR C1
11
PAOZZ
2640013354583
19207
12342634
12
PAOZZ
4730013461063
19207
12342793
13
PAOZZ
5330013463806
19207 12342794
14
PAOZZ
5310004492376
96906
MS21245-8
WHEEL AND RUN FLAT ASSEMBLY RADIAL

TIRE .................................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. RIM, WHEEL, PNEUMATIC ...........................
UOC:CT1, TC1
BOLT, RIBBED NECK ......................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. PACKING, PREFORMED ..............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. RUNFLAT, INSERT ........................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. BEADLOCK, TIRE RIM ..................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. RIM, WHEEL, PNEUMATIC ...........................
UOC:CT1, TC1
UOC:CT1, TC1
. CAP, PNEUMATIC VALVE ............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. VALVE CORE ................................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. VALVE, PNEUMATIC TIR ..............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PI .............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
. PACKING, PREFORMED ..............................
UOC:CT1, TC1
UOC:CT1, TC1
END OF FIGURE
13-1
1
1
12
1
1
1
1
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 14. Tire and Valve
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 1313 TIRES, TUBES, AND TIRE CHAINS

FIG. 14 TIRE AND VALVE
1
PCOFH
2610011481635
12195 03612460
PCOFH
2610013337632
19207
12342644
PAOZZ
2640005552829
96906
MS51368-2
PAOZZ
2640013021388
6V625
30-600
TIRE, PNEUMATIC BIAS PLY ........................

UOC:SPR, 258, 263
TIRE, PNEUMATIC ..........................................
UOC:CT1, TC1
VALVE, PNEUMATIC TIR ................................
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
VALVE, PNEUMATIC TIR NEW, 0.453 HOLE
UOC:SPR, 258, 263
END OF FIGURE
14-1
1
1
1
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 15. Chassis Frame Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 15 FRAME, TOWING ATTACHMENTS,

DRAWBARS, AND ARTICULATION SYSTEMS
GROUP 1501 FRAME ASSEMBLY
FIG. 15 CHASSIS FRAME ASSEMBLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5305000680511
5340007339365
5310008775972
5310000874652
5305011409118
5340000402372
5340007339367
5310000676356
80204
19207
19200
96906
80204
19207
19207
96906
8
9
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
4030013719331
5305009474356
19207
80204
10
PAOZZ
5310004838789
96906
11
11
12
13
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
2510007339406
5340007058969
5305002693239
2510007339407
19207
19207
80204
19207
B1821BH038C125N
7339365
10910174-3
MS51922-17
B1821BH038C088N
7339489
7339367
MS51922-57

BRACKET, ANGLE ..........................................
WASHER, FLAT ..............................................
BRACKET, ANGLE RIGHT ..............................
BRACKET, ANGLE LEFT ................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
12355838
SHACKLE ........................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
MS17829-6F
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
7339406
HANGER, SPRING, VEHIC LEFT ..................
7339405
BRACKET, MOUNTING RIGHT ......................
B1821BH038F138N SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H ...........................
7339407
SHACKLE, LEAF SPRING ...............................
END OF FIGURE
15-1
2
1
10
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
8
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 16. Drawbar Assembly and Safety Chains
(1)
ITEM
NO
SECTION II
(2)
SMR
CODE
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
TM9-2330-202-14&P
(5)
(6)
PART
NUMBER
GROUP 1503 PINTLES AND TOWING
ATTACHMENTS
(7)
QTY
FIG.16
DRAWBAR ASSEMBLY AND SAFTEY
CHAINS (M101A2,M116A2,M116A2E1,AND
M116A3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5305009456412
5310008775795
5306007337360
5310002694040
5305007245910
96906
96906
19207
96906
96906
19207
MS90727-127
MS21044-N8
7339360
MS51922-49
MS90725-162
7339474
PBOZZ
2540013697471
19207
10910697
7
8
9
10
11
12
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5305007098515
5305009589428
4010007339458
2540011543892
5310000577080
2510000402370
96906
96906
19207
19207
96906
19207
MS90727-88
MS90727-201
7339458
11675105
MS51922-29
7339475
12
PBOZZ
19207
10910698
13
14
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
96906
02386
MS51922-61
7339359
5310008329719
5365007339359
ENDOF FIGURE
16-1
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
.................
BOLT,EYE ............................
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
.................
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
BAR ASSEMBLY,DRAWBA
LEFT HAND ......
UOC:258,263
TOWBAR,MOTOR VEHICL
DRAWBAR, LEFT
HAND ................................
UOC:CT1,SPR,TC1
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
CHAIN ASSEMBLY,SING .................
BRACKET AND PLUNGER .................
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
.................
BAR ASSEMBLY,DRAWBA
RIGHT HAND .....
UOC:258,263
BRACKET,MOUNTING
DRAWBAR, RIGHT
HAND ................................
UOC:CT1,SPR,TC1
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
.................
SPACER,SLEEVE .......................
2
6
4
2
2
I
I
4
1
2
1
4
1
I
1
2
SECTION
TM9-2330-202-14&P
11
C01
1
0
0
1
0
1
3
.f@
-101
000
3
4
\tra
@0
0
5
8
Figure
17. Front
Support
Leg
SECTION
(2)
(1)
ITEM
SMR
NO CODE
II
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
TM9-2330-202-14&P
(5)
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
GROUP 1507
JACKS
FIG.17
1
2
3
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PFOZZ
5
7
8
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5310008329719
5305009472309
5305007195235
5120013880958
5340013863974
5315011470855
96906
80204
96906
MS51922-61
B1821BH075F375N
MS90727-114
02686
126861
19207
19207
19207
12436705
12441073
11602356-2
(7)
AND USABLE ON CODES (UOC)
LANDING
GEAR,
QTY
LEVELING
FRONT SUPPORT LEG
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
.................
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H .................
UOC:CT1,SPR,258,263
CAP,LANDING
JACK ....................
UOC:CT1,SPR,TC1
JACK,LEVELING-SUPPO
.................
HANDLE,BOW ..........................
PIN,LOCK ............................
END OF FIGURE
17-1
C01
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
SECTION 11
3
2
12
7
5
Figure 18. Spring Assembly
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 16 SPRINGS AND SHOCK ABSORBERS

GROUP 1601 SPRINGS
FIG. 18 SPRING ASSEMBLY
1
PAOZZ
5315002341671
96906
MS24665-633
PAOZZ
5315002981481
96906
MS24665-357
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
2510007410199
4730000504203
2510007339408
3120008107609
2510007058968
5310009980608
5310008095998
19207
96906
19207
96906
19207
96906
96906
7410199
MS15001-1
7339408
MS35771-91
7339409
MS35692-61
MS27183-18
9
10
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5310008775795
2510011448847
96906
19207
MS21044N8
12313029
10
PAOZZ
2510013533116
19207
12354240
11
12
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5340011478290
5306011478225
19207
19207
12313016
12313028
PIN, COTTER ..................................................

UOC:258, 263
PIN, COTTER ..................................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
PIN, VEHICULAR LEAF ...................................
FITTING, LUBRICATION .................................
PLATE SHACKLE INNER ...............................
BEARING, SLEEVE .........................................
LINK, SPRING SHACKLE ................................
NUT, PLAIN, SLOTTED, H ..............................
WASHER, FLAT ..............................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
SPRING ASSEMBLY, LEA 5 LEAVES ............
UOC:258, 263
SPRING ASSEMBLY, LEA 6 LEAVES ............
UOC:CT1, SPR, TC1
BUMPER, NONMETALLIC ...............................
BOLT, U ...........................................................
END OF FIGURE
18-1
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
3
4
4
1
1
1
2
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 19. Shock Absorber
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 1604 SHOCK ABSORBER EQUIPMENT

FIG. 19 SHOCK ABSORBER
1
2
3
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5365002754519
5310007339465
5310002256408
19207
19207
96906
7339466
7339465
MS51922-53
PAOZZ
2510007339464
19207
7339464
BUSHING, NONMETALLIC .............................

WASHER, RECESSED ....................................
UOC:CT1, SPR, 263
SHOCK ABSORBER, DIRE .............................
END OF FIGURE
19-1
4
2
2
1
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 20. Cargo Body, Rack, and Tailgate Assembly (M101A2 and M101A3)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 18 BODY, CAB, HOOD, AND HULL

GROUP 1810 CARGO BODY
FIG. 20 CARGO BODY, RACK, AND TAILGATE
ASSEMBLY (M101A2 AND M101A3)
1
PAOZZ
5310009296417
96906
MS24679-65
PAOZZ
5310005825965
96906
MS35338-44
PAOZZ
5310008094058
96906
MS27183-10
XDOZZ
88044
AN525-416R20
PAOZZ
2510013890410
19207
12436772S
PAOZZ
5310000587226
19207
587226
PAOZZ
5310005501130
96906
MS35333-40
PAOZZ
5305009881726
96906
MS35206-282
PFOZZ
2540001778120
19207
7339426
PFOZZ
5340013889098
19207
12441016
10
PAOZZ
5305009585246
96906
MS35190-289
11
PAOZZ
2510006500998
19207
7339508
11
PAOZZ
2510006585859
19207
7339507
11
12
13
PAOZZ
2510013890414
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
19207
88044
5310000430520
96906
12436773
AN525-10R9
MS35650-3252
14
PBOZZ
3040013171579
19207
7339434
15
PAOZZ
5315007339438
19207
7339438
16
PAOZZ
5315008395822
96906
MS24665-353
NUT, PLAIN, CAP ............................................

UOC:263
WASHER, LOCK .............................................
UOC:263
WASHER, FLAT ..............................................
UOC:263
SCREW, MACHINE .........................................
UOC:TC1, 263
TAKE, VEHICLE BODY FRONT COMPOSITE
UOC:TC1
NUT, PLAIN, PLATE USE WITH WOODEN
RACKS .............................................................
UOC:263
WASHER, LOCK USE WITH WOODEN RACKS
UOC:263
SCREW, MACHINE USE WITH WOODEN RACKS
UOC:263
CLIP, BOW VEHICULAR USE WITH WOODEN
SIDE RACKS ...................................................
UOC:263
POCKET, STAKE USE WITH COMPOSIT
SIDE RACKS ...................................................
UOC:263
SCREW, MACHINE USE WITH WOODEN RACKS
UOC:263
SIDE RACK, VEHICLE B SIDE WOODEN .....
UOC:263
SIDE RACK, VEHICLE B LEFT HAND,
WOODEN ........................................................
UOC:263
SIDE RACK, VEHICLE B COMPOSITE,
REVERSE TOP BOARD FOR L AND R
SIDE .................................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
SCREW MACHINE USE WITH COMPOSITE
RACKS .............................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON USE WITH
COMPOSITE RACKS ......................................
UOC:TC1, 263
CONNECTING LINK, RIG ................................
UOC:263
PIN, STRAIGHT, HEADED ..............................
UOC:263
PIN, COTTER ..................................................
UOC:263
20-1
34
74
74
74
1
88
52
52
8
8
36
1
1
1
36
40
1
8
12
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
17
PAOZZ
510007339505
(4)
PART
NUMBER
19207
18
PBOZZ
3040013171580
19207
19
PAOZZ
2510007339504
19207
20
PAOZZ
4030011718254
19207
21
PAOZZ
2510011221405
19207
22
PAOZZ
5315007339395
19207
22
PAOZZ
5315010566023
96906
23
PAOZZ
5310000874652
96906
24
PAOZZ
5305011409118
80204
25
PAOZZ
2540011267870
19207
26
PAOZZ
5340007339366
19207
27
PAOZZ
5306000885742
96906
28
PAOZZ
5310007320560
96906
29
PAOZZ
5310005845272
96906
30
PAOZZ
5310008095998
96906
31
PAOZZ
32
33
34
19207
PAOZZ
PBOZZ
PAOZZ
19207
2510013886424
5305000680511
19207
80204
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
SIDE RACK, VEHICLE B RIGHT HAND,

WOODEN ........................................................
UOC:263
7339435
CONNECTING LINK, RIG ................................
UOC:263
7339504
SIDE RACK, VEHICLE B LEFT HAND,
WOODEN ........................................................
UOC:263
7328241
HOOK, CARGO ...............................................
UOC:TC1, 263
7339510
TAILGATE, VEHICLE BO ................................
UOC:263
7339395
PIN, STRAIGHT, HEADED USE WITH OLD
STYLE CARGO BODY .....................................
UOC:263
MS20392-7C125
PIN, STRAIGHT, HEADED USE WITH NEW
STYLE CARGO BODY .....................................
UOC:TC1, 263
MS51922-17
UOC:263
UOC:263
8382970
CHAIN AND PIN ASSEM .................................
UOC:263
7339366
CLAMP, SYNCHRO .........................................
UOC:263
MS35751-70
BOLT, SQUARE NECK ....................................
UOC:263
MS51968-14
UOC:263
MS35338-48
WASHER, LOCK .............................................
UOC:263
MS27183-18
WASHER, FLAT ..............................................
UOC:263
12406440-1
PLATE USE WITH NEW STYLE CARGO
BODY ...............................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
12406703
BOLT, U USE WITH NEW STYLE CARGO
BOX ..................................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
12436764
BODY, CARGO TRAILER NEW STYLE, WITH
TAILGATE ........................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
UOC:TC1, 263
QTY
7339505
END OF FIGURE
20-2
1
2
1
11
1
4
4
18
5
2
8
10
8
8
8
4
4
1
3
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 21. Canvas Cover Assembly and Bows (M101A2 and M101A3)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 22 BODY, CHASSIS, AND HULL

ACCESSORY ITEMS
GROUP 2201 CANVAS, RUBBER, OR PLASTIC
ITEMS
FIG. 21 CANVAS COVER ASSEMBLY AND
BOWS (M101A2 AND M101A3)
1
PAOFF
2540005139794
19207
PAOFF
2540013257719
19207
PAOZZ
5340011681534
19207
PAOZZ
5325006411612
21450
XBOZZ
PAOZZ
5340010316310
19207
PAOZZ
5340010316268
19207
PAOZZ
2540002786560
19207
PAOZZ
5305009845681
96906
PAOOO 2540016930744
19207
PAOOO
19207
10
PAOZZ
81348
5305000712512
80204
11
PAOZZ
96906
12
PAOZZ
5310000881251
96906
13
PAOZZ
5305002678959
80204
14
PAOZZ
15
PAOZZ
5310013884494
96906
16
PAOZZ
5306007026344
96906
96906
8382966
COVER, FITTED, VEHICU COLOR: GREEN .

UOC:TC1, 263
8382966-1
COVER, FITTED, VEHICU COLOR: TAN .......
UOC:TC1, 263
8710494
STRAP, WEBBING ..........................................
UOC:TC1, 263
501437
GROMMET, METALLIC ...................................
UOC:TC1, 263
21-R-162
ROPE (SEE EXPENDABLES) .........................
UOC:TC1, 263
7979453
CLIP, SPRING TENSION .................................
UOC:TC1, 263
7979452
CLIP, END, STRAP ..........................................
UOC:TC1, 263
7339506
BOW, VEHICULAR TOP WOODEN ...............
UOC:263
MS35206-301
. SCREW, MACHINE USE WITH WOODEN BOWS
UOC:263
12441082-1
BOW, VEHICULAR TOP STEEL, GREEN ......
UOC:263
12441082-2
BOW, VEHICULAR TOP STEEL, TAN ...........
UOC:263
B1821BH025C225N . SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H USE WITH
STEEL BOWS ..................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
MS51412-26
. WASHER, FLAT ............................................
UOC:263
MS51922-1
UOC:263
B1821BH025F225N . SCREW, CAP, HEXAGON H .........................
UOC:263
MS51412-26
. WASHER, FLAT USE WITH STEEL BOWS
UOC:263
MS51473-01
. NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON ................................
UOC:263
MS35751-15
. BOLT, SQUARE NECK ..................................
UOC:263
END OF FIGURE
21-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
2
4
6
2
8
2
4
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 22. Reflector (MlOlA2 and M101A3)
SECTION II
(1)
(2)
(3)
ITEM SMR
NO CODE
CAGEC
(4)
PART
NUMBER
(5)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(6)
QTY
GROUP 2202 ACCESSORY ITEMS

FIG. 22 REFLECTOR (M101A2 AND M101A3)
1
1
2
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
9905002023639
9905002052795
5310007234458
96906
96906
96906
MS35387-2
MS35387-1
MS35690-404
PAOZZ
5310007616882
96906
MS51967-2
3
4
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5310005825965
5305009881728
96906
96906
MS35338-44
MS35206-287
PAOZZ
5305009881723
96906
MS35206-279
REFLECTOR, INDICATIN AMBER ..................

REFLECTOR, INDICATIN RED .......................
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON USE WITH OLD
STYLE CARGO BODY .....................................
NUT, PLAIN, HEXAGON USE WITH NEW
CARGO BODY .................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
WASHER, LOCK .............................................
SCREW, MACHINE USE WITH OLD STYLE
CARGO BODY .................................................
SCREW, MACHINE USE WITH NEW STYLE
CARGO BODY .................................................
UOC:TC1, 263
END OF FIGURE
22-1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
SECTION II
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure 23. Data Plates
(1)
ITEM
NO
QTY
SECTION II
(2)
(3)
SMR
CODE
NSN
TM9-2330-202-14&P
(4)
CAGEC
(7)
(5)
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
GROUP 2210
INSTRUCTION
FIG.23
1
PFOZZ
9905011475836
19207
12296614
PFOZZ
9905011475837
19207
12296615
PFOZZ
19207
12362799
PFOZZ
19207
12441068
PFOZZ
19207
12355895
PAOZZ
19207
12362800
PFOZZ
19207
12436756
PAOZZ
19207
12362754
PFOZZ
9905013542362
19207
12355904
3
4
PFOZZ
PAOZZ
7690011112265
5305009512437
19207
96906
12302516
MS21318-35
9905013603614
DATA PLATES AND

HOLDERS
DATA PLATES
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
DATA ...........
UOC:258,263
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
DATA ...........
UOC:263
PLATE IDENTIFICATIO
DATA ...........
UOC:CT1
DATA ...........
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
UOC:TC1
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
DATA ...........
UOC:SPR
TRANSPORTATION.
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
UOC:CT1
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
TRANSPORTATION.
UOC:263
PLATE,IDENTIFICATIO
DATA ...........
UOC:SPR,TC1
PLATE,INSTRUCTION
TRANSPORTATION ...
UOC:SPR
DECAL CAUTION, SILICONE BRAKE FLUID
SCREW,DRIVE .........................
END OF FIGURE
23-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
SECTION
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
11
C01
2=
15
15
1r
7
8
5
14
6
10
13
12
Figure
24. Rear Stabilizer
Kit
(1)
ITEM
NO
SECTION II
(2)
(3)
SMR
CODE
NSN
TM9-2330-202-14&P
(4)
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
CO1
(6)
(7)
QTY
GROUP 33 SPECIAL
GROUP 3307
FIG.24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PAOZZ
2590011799080
19207
10944400
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PFOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
XAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
PAOZZ
5310007320559
5340011808610
5340011955919
5310006379541
5305002693238
5310002256408
96906
19207
19207
96046
96906
96906
19207
19207
19207
96906
96906
96906
19207
19207
MS51968-8
10944402
10944399
20-14-5
MS90727-62
MS51922-53
8681938
8681937
10916389
MS15001-1
MS20392-7C27
MS24665-353
8681932
8681933
5360008868064
2590004396288
4730000504203
5315009042800
5315008395822
5306008832619
3040001778056
SPECIAL
PURPOSE KITS
PURPOSE KITS
REAR STABILIZER
KIT
STABILIZER
KIT,REAR
REQUIRED FOR
GENERATOR SETS ONLY .................
NUT,PLAIN,HEXAGON
..................
BRACKET,DOUBLE
ANGL ................
BRACKET,ANGLE ......................
WASHER,LOCK ........................
SCREW,CAP,HEXAGON
H ................
NUT,SELF-LOCKING,HE
................
ARM ASSEMBLY,STABAL
................
SPRING,HELICAL,EXTE
................
JACK,LEVELING-SUPPO
................
FITTING,LUBRICATION
................
PIN,STRAIGHT,HEADED
................
PIN,COTTER .........................
BOLT,SHOULDER ......................
BRACKET,EYE,NONROTA
................
END OF FIGURE
24-1
1
4
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(1)
ITEM
NO
SECTION
(2)
SMR
CODE
TM9-2330-202-14&P
II
(3)
(4)
NSN
CAGEC
(5)
PART
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
C01
(6)
GROUP 95 GENERAL
PARTS
GROUP 9501
FIG.
1
PAOZZ
4710001020108
19207
PAOZZ
4710002000298
81349
10943231
M3520-B80A00G
QTY
USE STANDARDIZED
BULK MATERIEL
BULK
TUBE,BENT,METALLIC
..................
UOC:SPR,258,263
TUBE,METALLIC
.......................
END OF FIGURE
BULK-1
(7)
v
v
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CO1
CROSS-REFERENCE
INDEXES
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER INDEX
STOCK NUMBER
5310-00-003-4094
5315-00-013-7238
6240-00-019-0877
6240-00-019-3093
5342-00-040-2364
5340-00-040-2365
2510-00-040-2370
5340-00-040-2372
5310-00-043-0520
5310-00-044-6477
6240-00-044-6914
5310-00-045-3296
2640-00-050-1229
4730-00-050-4203
5310-00-057-7080
5310-00-061-1258
5310-00-067-6356
5305-00-068-0511
5305-00-071-2512
5975-00-074-2072
5310-00-074-2328
5310-00-087-4652
5310-00-088-1251
5306-00-088-5742
3110-00-100-5303
4710-00-102-0108
5310-00-134-4141
6240-00-143-3159
5310-00-143-6102
6240-00-155-8717
2530-00-161-7575
2530-00-161-7576
5340-00-177-7832
3040-00-177-8056
5325-00-185-0001
4710-00-200-0298
9905-00-202-3639
9905-00-205-2795
5310-00-209-1761
5305-00-225-3843
5310-00-225-6408
FIG.
10
12
1
1
2
2
16
15
20
21
21
1
2
4
13
18
24
10
16
1
15
15
20
21
4
10
15
20
21
20
12
BULK
11
11
11
11
1
11
1
9
9
4
24
4
BULK
22
22
10
11
19
ITEM
16
3
9
12
2
6
12
6
9
9
12
11
5
8
10
3
11
15
11
4
7
1
30
8
5
19
4
19
10
23
9
1
3
6
18
24
12
11
9
1
1
11
15
6
2
1
1
11
19
3
STOCK NUMBER
5310-00-225-6408
5306-00-225-9096
5306-00-226-4822
5315-00-234-1671
5315-00-236-8368
5305-00-267-8953
5305-00-267-8959
5305-00-269-2811
5305-00-269-3234
5305-00-269-3236
5305-00-269-3238
5305-00-269-3239
5310-00-269-4040
5365-00-275-4519
5310-00-275-6635
4730-00-278-8853
5340-00-282-7515
5310-00-285-7037
5330-00-291-6658
5315-00-298-1481
5360-00-384-0004
5360-00-384-0025
5310-00-395-2948
5305-00-432-4203
2590-00-439-6288
5310-00-449-2376
5331-00-462-0907
5365-00-475-8291
5310-00-483-8789
4720-00-489-5350
4710-00-511-1692
2540-00-513-9794
5310-00-514-6674
2640-00-555-2829
5310-00-582-5965
5310-00-584-5272
2530-00-585-6079
6240-00-617-0991
5310-00-637-9541
5325-00-641-1612
2540-00-693-0744
5306-00-702-6344
2510-00-705-8968
5340-00-705-8969
5305-00-709-8423
FIG.
ITEM
24
7
9
18
12
11
21
7
4
8
24
15
16
19
10
11
4
2
10
18
8
8
4
4
24
13
1
7
15
10
10
21
9
14
11
20
22
20
9
1
1
4
8
24
21
21
21
18
15
10
7
5
4
1
3
12
11
6
14
3
6
12
4
1
9
4
9
5
35
1
15
11
2
4
10
14
3
2
10
33
31
1
3
3
25
2
3
25
5
11
5
13
5
5
3
7
14
6
11
7
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
C01
CROSS-REFERENCE
INDEXES
NATIONAL
STOCK NUMBER INDEX
STOCK NUMBER
5305-00-709-8515
5305-00-709-8542
5305-00-710-4205
5305-00-719-5209
5305-00-719-5235
5310-00-723-4458
5305-00-724-5910
5310-00-732-0559
5310-00-732-0560
5306-00-733-7360
5365-00-733-9359
5340-00-733-9365
5340-00-733-9366
5340-00-733-9367
5315-00-733-9395
2510-00-733-9406
2510-00-733-9407
2510-00-733-9408
5315-00-733-9438
4010-00-733-9458
2510-00-733-9464
5310-00-733-9465
2510-00-733-9504
5330-00-737-3354
2510-00-741-0199
5310-00-761-6882
4730-00-773-2163
5340-00-778-2738
5310-00-807-1469
5310-00-809-4058
5310-00-809-5998
5310-00-810-1786
3120-00-810-7609
5310-00-816-6352
6150-00-830-6672
5310-00-832-9719
2590-00-832-9976
5315-00-839-5822
5305-00-855-0957
5305-00-855-0958
5305-00-855-0964
5340-00-860-0555
FIG.
ITEM
16
10
10
10
17
22
16
8
24
10
20
16
16
15
20
15
20
15
15
18
20
16
19
19
20
10
18
22
10
11
7
11
20
18
20
7
18
12
12
3
16
17
2
20
24
4
11
11
11
2
STOCK NUMBER
7
30
6
13
3
2
5
6
2
17
24
3
14
2
22
6
18
11
13
4
11
9
4
2
15
38
2
2
39
8
1
20
3
8
26
9
5
5
6
1
13
1
2
12
13
1
9
9
15
2
5340-00-860-0555
5325-00-864-2993
3040-00-872-8567
5310-00-874-2922
5360-00-877-2964
5310-00-877-5795
5310-00-877-5972
5305-00-881-3824
5306-00-883-2619
5360-00-886-8064
5315-00-904-2800
5310-00-929-6417
5310-00-934-9758
5340-00-936-5284
5305-00-945-6412
5305-00-947-4356
5305-00-949-6184
5305-00-951-2437
5305-00-958-0605
5305-00-958-5258
5305-00-958-9428
5310-00-959-1488
5305-00-984-6210
5305-00-988-1723
5305-00-988-1728
5340-00-993-6207
5310-00-998-0608
5340-01-031-6268
5340-01-031-6310
4730-01-043-3055
5330-01-044-1941
2510-01-050-7136
2530-01-050-7698
5310-01-050-8832
2530-01-050-8929
2540-01-051-6354
2540-01-051-6355
3120-01-052-1151
5365-01-053-6898
4730-01-053-8468
5360-01-054-2281
5315-01-056-6023
2540-01-060-7031
5340-01-068-6693
5340-01-069-6705
5340-01-070-4475
I-2
FIG.
ITEM
4
11
8
8
8
10
16
18
15
2
24
24
24
20
2
4
7
16
15
10
23
7
12
16
10
2
4
22
22
11
18
21
21
11
11
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
10
8
8
7
15
14
7
8
14
2
2
9
3
4
14
9
12
1
7
10
7
1
9
29
4
4
13
8
14
4
7
4
4
13
7
6
5
21
26
28
22
20
34
5
3
4
8
12
21
18
18
16
7
3
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CROSS-REFERENCE
STOCK NUMBER
2530-01-070-9494
5340-01-071-2098
5120-01-074-9323
5315-01-079-1494
1005-01-083-9297
5360-01-088-0552
2640-01-098-2029
7690-01-111-2265
2510-01-122-1405
2540-01-126-7870
5340-01-132-1175
2530-01-138-9385
5310-01-139-2070
3040-01-139-9900
5330-01-140-8231
5305-01-140-9118
2510-01-144-8847
5315-01-147-0855
9905-01-147-5836
9905-01-147-5837
5306-01-147-8225
5340-01-147-8290
2610-01-148-1635
2530-01-148-7074
5310-01-149-0868
3040-01-149-5061
2540-01-154-3892
2530-01-154-6952
4010-01-158-6795
2530-01-160-0850
3110-01-165-4860
6150-01-167-1827
2530-01-167-1999
5340-01-168-1534
2530-01-168-7906
5975-01-170-3480
4030-01-171-8254
2590-01-179-9080
5340-01-180-8610
5340-01-195-5919
5310-01-198-7585
2530-01-216-9259
5306-01-237-6844
6220-01-284-2709
2530-01-287-6869
6220-01-293-2627
6220-01-297-3217
2640-01-302-1388
C01
INDEXES
NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX

FIG.
ITEM
STOCK NUMBER
8
8
8
8
8
8
13
23
20
20
4
5
7
12
12
1
15
20
18
17
23
23
18
18
14
12
12
12
16
12
10
9
12
2
10
21
6
4
20
24
24
24
13
8
12
1
8
1
1
14
13
4
9
2
18
17
9
3
17
21
12
1
8
11
8
6
5
20
10
7
1
1
12
11
1
12
14
2
10
1
23
2
7
1
27
2
1
16
16
1
3
4
8
10
10
10
1
8
8
3
4720-01-306-6294
3040-01-317-1579
3040-01-317-1580
2540-01-325-7719
2610-01-333-7632
2640-01-334-9453
2640-01-335-4583
5331-01-335-8878
2530-01-336-3127
2530-01-336-5740
5306-01-336-7175
2530-01-338-2730
4730-01-346-1063
5331-01-346-3806
5340-01-348-2989
2510-01-353-3116
9905-01-354-2362
6220-01-359-2870
9905-01-360-3614
2540-01-369-7471
4030-01-371-9331
6220-01-372-3883
5340-01-385-9852
5340-01-386-3974
5120-01-388-0958
5310-01-388-4494
2510-01-388-6424
5340-01-388-9098
2510-01-389-0410
2510-01-389-0414
2530-01-390-4684
2530-01-429-8346
2530-01-430-7250
I-3
FIG.
11
20
20
21
14
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
10
18
23
1
23
16
15
1
10
17
17
21
20
20
20
20
20
5
6
8
ITEM
10
10
14
1
2
5
11
4
7
2
3
6
12
13
1
10
2
2
1
6
8
1
24
8
5
13
29
6
5
5
7
2
1
12
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CO1
CROSS-REFERENCE
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX
CAGEC
PART NUMBER
STOCK NUMBER
88044
88044
80204
80204
80204
80204
80204
AN525-10R9
AN525-416R20
B1821BH025C100N
B1821BH025C225N
B1821BH025F225N
B1821BH031C050N
B1821BH038C088N
5305-00-225-3843
5305-00-071-2512
5305-00-267-8959
5306-00-226-4822
5305-01-140-9118
80204
B1821BH038C125N
5305-00-068-0511
80204
80204
80204
63477
96906
96906
B1821BH038F138N
B1821BHO75C35ON
B1821BHO75F375N
F6019
MS122031
MS15001-1
5305-00-269-3239
5305-00-947-4356
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS15570-1251
MS15570-623
MS15570-89
MS17829-6F
MS20392-7C125
MS20392-7C27
MS21042-5
MS21042-6
MS21044-N8
MS21044N8
6240-00-019-0877
6240-00-019-3093
6240-00-143-3159
5310-00-483-8789
5315-01-056-6023
5315-00-904-2800
5310-00-807-1469
5310-00-810-1786
5310-00-877-5795
5310-00-877-5795
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS21083-C7
MS21245-8
MS21318-35
MS21333-2
MS21333-37
MS21333-99
MS24629-45
5310-00-074-2328
5310-00-449-2376
5305-00-951-2437
5340-00-778-2738
5340-00-282-7515
5340-00-993-6207
5305-00-855-0958
96906
96906
96906
MS24629-46
MS24629-48
MS24665-353
5305-00-855-0957
5305-00-855-0964
5315-00-839-5822
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS24665-357
MS24665-425
MS24665-436
MS24665-633
MS24679-65
MS27111-10
5315-00-298-1481
5315-00-013-7238
5315-00-236-8368
5315-00-234-1671
5310-00-929-6417
5310-00-816-6352
96906
MS27183-10
5310-00-809-4058
96906
MS27183-18
5310-00-809-5998
5330-00-291-6658
5310-00-285-7037
4730-00-050-4203
I-4
FIG.
20
20
11
21
21
9
1
15
20
15
20
15
15
17
10
2
18
24
1
1
1
15
20
24
7
7
16
10
18
10
13
23
11
4
11
11
11
4
11
20
24
18
12
12
18
20
12
12
11
20
18
ITEM
8
4
19
8
11
4
6
5
20
1
30
12
9
2
35
5
3
11
9
12
12
10
18
12
1
9
2
2
9
19
14
4
8
9
13
9
9
1
15
12
13
1
3
3
1
1
5
6
20
3
8
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CROSS-REFERENCE
CAGEC
PART NUMBER
CO1
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

STOCK NUMBER
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS27183-18
MS3367-1-9
MS35190-317
MS35206-263
5310-00-809-5998
5975-00-074-2072
5305-00-958-5258
5305-00-984-6210
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS35206-279
MS35206-287
MS35207-298
MS35335-34
MS35338-43
5305-00-988-1723
5305-00-988-1728
5305-00-958-0605
5310-00-514-6674
5310-00-045-3296
96906
MS35338-44
5310-00-582-5965
96906
MS35338-46
5310-00-637-9541
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS35338-48
MS35387-1
MS35387-2
MS35478-1073
MS35478-1683
MS35489-46
MS35649-202
5310-00-584-5272
9905-00-205-2795
9905-00-202-3639
6240-00-617-0991
6240-00-044-6914
5325-00-185-0001
5310-00-934-9758
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS35650-3252
MS35690-404
MS35692-61
MS35751-15
MS35751-70
MS35771-91
MS35845-11
MS45904-64
MS45904-76
MS51368-2
MS51412-25
5310-00-043-0520
5310-00-723-4458
5310-00-998-0608
5306-00-702-6344
5306-00-088-5742
3120-00-810-7609
96906
96906
96906
96906
MS51473-01
MS51861-47
MS51922-1
MS51922-17
5310-01-388-4494
5305-00-432-4203
5310-00-088-1251
5310-00-087-4652
96906
96906
MS51922-21
MS51922-29
5310-00-959-1488
5310-00-057-7080
96906
96906
MS51922-49
MS51922-53
5310-00-269-4040
5310-00-225-6408
96906
96906
96906
MS51922-57
MS51922-6
MS51922-61
5310-00-067-6356
5310-00-143-6102
5310-00-832-9719
5310-00-395-2948
5310-00-061-1258
2640-00-555-2829
5310-00-044-6477
I-5
FIG.
20
4
12
2
4
22
22
7
9
2
4
11
20
22
1
4
8
20
22
22
1
1
4
2
4
20
22
18
21
20
18
10
4
1
14
21
21
21
4
21
15
20
10
10
16
16
19
24
15
11
16
ITEM
26
5
13
4
7
4
4
4
3
5
8
25
2
3
5
13
5
25
1
1
11
11
6
7
10
9
2
7
14
23
5
32
2
4
3
9
12
13
4
10
4
19
14
15
11
4
3
7
7
11
13
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
C0O
CROSS-REFERENCE
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

CAGEC
PART
NUMBER
STOCK
NUMBER
96906
96906
96906
MS51922-61
MS51967-2
MS51968-14
5310-00-832-9719
5310-00-761-6882
5310-00-732-0560
96906
MS51968-8
5310-00-732-0559
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
96906
81349
81348
81348
81348
12195
14892
93072
93072
93072
19200
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
21450
MS51975-2
MS521301A204R
MS90725-162
MS90726-41
MS90726-67
MS90726-99
MS90727-110
MS90727-114
MS90727-127
MS90727-201
MS90727-5
MS90727-58
MS90727-60
MS90727-62
MS90727-88
MS90727-91
MS90727-97
M3520-B80A00G
TYIV/CL1/TRVC8
TYV/CL2/TR C1
W-L-00111/60
03612460
049206
10614
10632
10703
10910174-3
10910697
10910698
10916389
10924576
10926073
10926074
10926075
10926094
10943231
10944399
10944400
10944402
110357
5305-00-949-6184
4720-00-489-5350
5305-00-724-5910
5306-00-225-9096
5305-00-269-2811
5305-00-710-4205
5305-00-719-5209
5305-00-719-5235
5305-00-945-6412
5305-00-958-9428
5305-00-267-8953
5305-00-269-3234
5305-00-269-3236
5305-00-269-3238
5305-00-709-8515
5305-00-709-8542
5305-00-709-8423
4710-00-200-0298
2640-01-098-2029
2640-00-050-1229
6240-00-155-8717
2610-01-148-1635
2530-01-160-0850
2530-01-050-8929
2540-01-060-7031
2530-01-167-1999
5310-00-877-5972
2540-01-369-7471
19207
19207
11602356-2
11625496
5315-01-147-0855
4730-01-043-3055
2590-00-439-6288
5975-01-170-3480
5340-00-936-5284
5340-01-070-4475
5365-00-475-8291
5310-01-139-2070
4710-00-102-0108
5340-01-195-5919
2590-01-179-9080
5340-01-180-8610
5310-00-134-4141
I-6
FIG.
17
22
10
20
8
24
10
10
16
7
7
10
10
17
16
16
11
4
8
24
16
10
10
BULK
13
13
1
14
9
10
10
10
15
16
16
24
4
7
7
7
7
BULK
24
24
24
11
11
11
11
17
11
ITEM
1
2
17
24
6
2
29
33
5
5
6
6
13
3
1
8
12
14
3
6
7
30
7
2
9
10
9
1
2
34
18
27
3
6
12
10
16
7
3
2
8
1
4
1
3
3
6
18
24
7
21
SECTION
TM9-2330-202-14&P
IV
CROSS-REFERENCE
CAGEC
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19204
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
PART NUMBER
11625497
11639519-2
11652180
11652180-2
11675013
11675105
11686100
11686100-56.5
11686101
11686102
11686102-1X
11686103-1
11686103-1-1X
11686103-2
11686103-2-1X
11686257
11686262-1
11686262-2
11686267-1
11686267-2
11686270
11686271
11686272
11686273
11686274
11686275
11686276
11686277
11686279
11686280
11686281
11838714
12296386
12296614
12296615
12302516
12313006
12313010
12313012
12313016
12313027
12313028
12313029
12313045
12313046
12313047
12313048
12314088
12331722
12338799
12339501
C01
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

STOCK NUMBER
5330-01-044-1941
5331-00-462-0907
6150-01-167-1827
5340-01-348-2989
2540-01-154-3892
2530-01-168-7906
2530-01-070-9494
5340-01-069-6705
3040-00-872-8567
2530-00-161-7576
2530-00-161-7575
5360-00-384-0025
1005-01-083-9297
5360-00-384-0004
5315-01-079-1494
5360-01-088-0552
5340-01-068-6693
5340-01-071-2098
2530-00-585-6079
5360-00-877-2964
5310-00-874-2922
5120-01-074-9323
2530-01-216-9259
4010-01-158-6795
9905-01-147-5836
9905-01-147-5837
7690-01-111-2265
2530-01-138-9385
3040-01-139-9900
2530-01-148-7074
5340-01-147-8290
5330-01-140-8231
5306-01-147-8225
2510-01-144-8847
3110-01-165-4860
3110-00-100-5303
5310-01-149-0868
3040-01-149-5061
5340-01-385-9852
5310-01-198-7585
I-7
FIG.
11
1
2
2
10
16
11
11
6
11
11
11
11
11
11
8
8
8
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
8
8
8
8
10
23
23
23
5
12
12
18
12
18
18
12
12
12
12
10
10
14
13
ITEM
26
3
1
1
1
10
1
2
1
5
7
22
23
16
17
13
7
7
1
1
11
18
15
2
17
16
4
5
14
8
9
10
23
1
1
3
1
11
12
11
8
12
10
7
9
14
2
25
24
2
8
SECTION
CAGEC
IV
PART NUMBER
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CO1
CROSS-REFERENCE
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

STOCK NUMBER
19207
19207
19207
34623
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
12342633
12342634
12342638
12342639
12342640
12342641
12342642
12342644
12342758
12342793
12342794
12354199
12354223
12354224
12354224-1
12354225
12354225-1
12354240
12355838
12355895
12355904
12356020
12360850-1
12360870-1
12360870-2
12362746
12362754
12362791
12362795
12362795-1
12362796
12362796-1
12362799
12362800
12375837
12375838
12375841
12406440-1
12406703
12436705
12436756
12436764
12436764-1
12436772
5331-01-335-8878
2640-01-335-4583
2640-01-334-9453
2530-01-338-2730
2530-01-336-3127
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
12436773
12440462
12440463
12441016
12441068
12441073
2510-01-389-0414
2510-00-733-9504
2530-01-336-5740
2610-01-333-7632
5306-01-336-7175
4730-01-346-1063
5331-01-346-3806
4720-01-306-6294
5306-01-237-6844
2510-01-353-3116
4030-01-371-9331
9905-01-360-3614
9905-01-354-2362
6220-01-284-2709
6220-01-293-2627
6220-01-297-3217
2530-01-390-4684
6220-01-372-3883
6220-01-359-2870
5120-01-388-0958
2510-01-388-6424
2510-01-389-0410
5340-01-388-9098
5340-01-386-3974
I-8
FIG.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
13
13
13
11
12
11
11
11
11
18
15
23
23
10
1
1
1
10
23
5
11
11
11
11
23
23
1
1
1
20
20
17
23
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
23
17
ITEM
4
11
5
6
7
1
2
2
3
12
13
10
10
1
2
5
7
10
8
1
2
26
10
8
8
10
2
2
16
17
22
23
1
2
1
7
2
27
28
5
2
29
29
5
5
7
15
13
6
1
8
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CROSS-REFERENCE
CAGEC
19207
19207
19207
19207
02686
02686
11862
21450
92867
19207
93072
93072
93072
93072
93072
93072
93072
93072
94189
96046
81348
01276
6V625
21450
19207
19207
93072
19207
19207
02386
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
PART NUMBER
12441077
12441082-1
12441093
12448059
126861
126945
14035374
143449
15641501
171591
1745
1804
1808-1
1828
1829
1840
1841
1844-2
18496
20-14-5
21-R-162
210104-8S
30-600
501437
5160323
5214539
622794-X
7328241
7336030
7339359
7339360
7339365
7339366
7339367
7339395
7339405
7339406
7339407
7339408
7339409
7339434
7339435
7339438
7339458
7339464
7339465
7339466
7339474
7339475
7339489
7339510
CO1
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

STOCK NUMBER
2540-00-693-0744
2530-01-430-7250
2530-01-154-6952
4730-00-278-8853
2530-01-429-8346
5305-00-881-3824
3120-01-052-1151
2530-01-050-7698
2540-01-051-6355
5360-01-054-2281
2540-01-051-6354
5310-01-050-8832
5365-01-053-6898
2510-01-050-7136
2530-01-287-6869
5310-00-637-9541
5310-00-003-4094
2640-01-302-1388
5325-00-641-1612
5310-00-209-1761
5310-00-275-6635
4030-01-171-8254
5340-01-132-1175
5365-00-733-9359
5306-00-733-7360
5340-00-733-9365
5340-00-733-9366
5340-00-733-9367
5315-00-733-9395
5340-00-705-8969
2510-00-733-9406
2510-00-733-9407
2510-00-733-9408
2510-00-705-8968
3040-01-317-1579
3040-01-317-1580
5315-00-733-9438
4010-00-733-9458
2510-00-733-9464
5310-00-733-9465
5365-00-275-4519
2510-00-040-2370
5340-00-040-2372
2510-01-122-1405
I-9
FIG.
2
21
12
8
17
10
12
11
6
2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
24
21
10
14
21
10
10
10
20
4
16
16
15
20
15
20
15
15
15
18
18
20
20
20
16
19
19
19
16
16
15
20
ITEM
3
7
4
12
4
37
1
4
1
4
4
22
3
21
5
20
8
28
1
5
4
16
3
3
11
9
36
16
12
14
3
2
22
6
18
11
11
13
4
6
10
14
11
9
4
2
1
6
12
6
17
SECTION
IV
TM9-2330-202-14&P
CROSS-REFERENCE
CAGEC
PART NUMBER
CO1
INDEXES
PART NUMBER INDEX

STOCK NUMBER
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
63477
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
19207
7373354
7410199
7735289
7979250
7979452
7979453
7979691
8347212
8347213
8365426
8382966
8382966-1
8382966-2
8382970
8382973
8681932
8681933
8681937
8681938
8710494
8722865
8722870
5330-00-737-3354
2510-00-741-0199
5325-00-864-2993
19207
19207
8722943
8762000
2590-00-832-9976
4730-01-053-8468
5340-01-031-6268
5340-01-031-6310
4730-00-773-2163
5342-00-040-2364
5340-00-040-2365
4710-00-511-1692
2540-00-513-9794
2540-01-325-7719
2540-01-126-7870
5340-00-177-7832
5306-00-883-2619
3040-00-177-8056
5360-00-886-8064
5340-01-168-1534
6150-00-830-6672
5340-00-860-0555
I-10
FIG.
10
18
11
4
21
21
10
2
2
10
21
21
21
20
4
24
24
24
24
21
3
2
4
2
10
ITEM
38
2
14
3
6
5
39
2
6
31
1
1
1
21
11
14
15
9
8
2
1
2
15
2
12
PIN: 053993-001
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX F
EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
Paragraph
Number
F-1
F-2
F-1.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
Scope ....................................................................................................................... F-1

Explanation of Columns in Section II ............................................................................... F-1
SCOPE.
This appendix lists expendable/durable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain the M101 and
M116 Series trailers. This listing is for informational purposes only and is not authority to requisition the listed items.
These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970 or CTA 8-100.
F-2.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN SECTION II.
There are five columns in Section II, Expendable and Durable Items List:
Column (1) - Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the listing and is referenced in the "Initial Setup"
of maintenance paragraphs or narrative instructions to identify the material needed. For example: "Solvent,
drycleaning (Item 15, Appendix F)."
Column (2)
- Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item:
C - Operator/Crew
O - Unit
F - Direct Support
H - General Support
Column (3) - National Stock Number. This is the national stock number assigned to the item; use it to request or
requisition the item.
Column (4) - Description (CAGEC). This column contains the Federal item name and, if required, a description to
identify the item. The last line for each item indicates the commercial and government entity code (CAGEC) in
parentheses followed by the part number, if applicable.
Column (5) - U/M (Unit of Measure). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual maintenance function.
This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation: BD (bundle), BE (bale), CA (cartridge), CN
(can), DR (drum), EA (each), FT (foot), GL (gallon), PG (package), PT (pint), QT (quart), and RO (roll). If the
unit of measure differs from the unit of issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your requirements.
F-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
1
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
DESCRIPTION
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
UNIT
OF
MEAS
7920-00-061-0038
7920-00-900-3577
5350-00-192-5051
5350-00-174-0985
7930-00-282-9699
BRUSH: Scrub
(81348) H-B-1490
EA
BRUSH: Wire
(17987) 15SS
EA
CLOTH: Abrasive, 180 Grit

(58536) A-A1048
50 Each
PG
CLOTH: Abrasive, 600 Grit

(81348) GGG-C-520
100 Each
BD
DETERGENT: General Purpose, Liquid

(81349) MIL-D-16791
1-Gallon Can
GL
FLUID: Brake Silicone, Automotive, All Weather,

Operational and Preservative
(81349) MIL-B-46176
9150-01-102-9455
9150-01-123-3152
9150-01-072-8379
(CAGEC)
1-Gallon Can, Plastic

5-Gallon Can
55-Gallon Drum
GL
CN
DR
GREASE: Automotive and Artillery, GAA

(81349) MIL-G-10924 E & F
9150-01-197-7693
9150-01-197-7690
9150-01-197-7689
9150-01-197-7692
14-Ounce Cartridge
1 3/4 Pound Can
6 1/2 Pound Can
35-Pound Pail
CA
CN
CN
CN
6640-01-364-1413
JAR: Screw Cap,

(15481) 033-670
Package of 12, 32-Ounce Capacity
PG
LUBRICANT: Runflat
(19207)12339497
2 Packets
PG
2640-01-262-9517
F-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
10
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
DESCRIPTION
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
UNIT
OF
MEAS
OIL: Lubricating, Internal Combustion Engine,

Arctic, OEA
(81349) MIL-L-46167
9150-00-402-4478
9150-00-402-2372
9150-00-491-7197
11
13
14
15
16
QT
CN
DR
1-Quart Can
5-Gallon Can
55-Gallon Drum
QT
CN
DR

Tactical Service, OE/HDO 30
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-186-6681
9150-00-188-9858
9150-00-189-6729
1-Quart Can
5-Gallon Can
55-Gallon Drum
QT
CN
DR
7920-00-205-1711
RAG: Wiping, Cotton and Cotton Synthetic,

White
(58536) A-A-531
50-Pound Bale
BE
ROPE
3/8-Inch Diameter
RL
1-Quart Can
5-Gallon Can
55-Gallon Drum
Tactical Service, OE/HDO 10
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-189-6727
9150-00-186-6668
9150-00-191-2772
12
(CAGEC)
SOLVENT: Drycleaning, Type II

(81349) P-D-680
6850-00-110-4498
6850-00-664-5685
6850-00-281-1985
6850-00-274-5421
6850-00-285-8011
1-Pint Can
1-Quart Can
1-Gallon Can
5-Gallon Can
55-Gallon Drum
PT
QT
GL
CN
DR
9905-00-537-8954
TAG: Marker
(81349) MIL-T-12755
50 Each
BD
F-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
17
18
19
20
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
DESCRIPTION
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
UNIT
OF
MEAS
9330-01-345-0507
5640-00-103-2254
7510-00-802-8311
4720-01-014-4915
(CAGEC)
TAPE: Adhesive, Acrylic
(30076) 353191
60-Yard Roll
RO
TAPE: Duct, 2 Inches Wide

(07124) C-519
60-Yard Roll
RO
TAPE: Pressure Sensitive

(52170) 898
3/4 Inch Wide, 60-Yard Roll
RO
TUBING: Plastic
(06853) 246115
8-Inch, Black
FT
F-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX G
ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS
Paragraph
Number
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
G-1
Introduction ................................................................................................................ G-1
Table G-1 Manufactured Items Part Number Index ........................................................................... G-1
G-1.
INTRODUCTION .
a.
This appendix includes complete instructions for making items authorized to be manufactured or fabricated at
the Unit level of maintenance.
b.
A part number index in alphanumeric order is provided in Table G-1 for cross-referencing the part number of
the item to be manufactured to the figure that covers the fabrication criteria.
c.
All bulk materials needed for the manufacture of an item are listed by part number or specification number in a
tabular list on the illustration in Section II.
d.
When manufacturing items, make sure the appropriate tools are used to cut, shape, and thread materials.
Make sure hoses are clean and free of dust and moisture before installing after fabrication.
e.
All dimensions given in Section II, Manufacturing Instructions, are in standard units.
Table G-1. Manufactured Items Part Number Index

Part Number
Figure Title
Figure Number
RRC271-8
Adjustable Front Support Leg Chain
G-9
11686100
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front

(M101A2 and M116A2)
G-1
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear
G-3
11686102
(M101A2 and M116A2)

11686103-1
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left

(M101A2, M116A2, and M116A2E1)
G-5
11686103-2
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Right

(M101A2, M116A2, and M116A2E1)
G-5
G-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Table G-1. Manufactured Items Part Number Index (continued)
Part Number
Figure Title
Figure Number
12354224
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front

(M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3)
G-2
12354225
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear

(M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3)
G-4
12362795
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Right

(M101A3 and M1 16A3)
G-7
12362796
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left

(M101A3 and M116A3)
G-6
7339259
Drawbar Clamp Spacer (M101A2 and

M116A2)
G-8
G-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Section II. MANUFACTURING INSTRUCTIONS

Paragraph
Number
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
G-1
G-2
G-3
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-9
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front (M101A2 and M1 16A2)..................................... G-3

Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front (M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3) .................. G-4
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear (M101A2 and M1 16A2) ..................................... G-4
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear (M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3) .................. G-5
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left and Right (M101A2, M116A2, and M116A2E1) ...... G-6
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left (M101A3 and M116A3) ....................................... G-7
Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Right (M101A3 and Ml 16A3)...................................... G-8
Drawbar Clamp Spacer (M101 A2 and M1116A2) ........................................................ G-9
Adjustable Front Support Leg Chain........................................................................... G-9
Figure G-1. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front (M101A2 and M116A2)
1.
Fabricate from tube, part number 10943231, NSN 4710-00-102-0108.
2.
Cut to proper length and bend as shown to create part number 11686100-56.5.
3.
Install nut, part number 110357, on each end of tube assembly, as shown.
G-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-2. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Front (M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3)
1.
Fabricate from tube, part number M3520-B80AOOG, NSN 4710-00-200-0298.
2.
Cut to proper length and bend as shown to create part number 12354224-1.
3.
Figure G-3. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear (M101A2 and M116A2)
1.
Fabricate from tube,
part number M3520B80AOOG, NSN 4710-00-200-0298.
G-4
2.
Cut to proper length and bend as shown to

create part number 11686102-1X.
3.
Install nut, part number 110357, on each end

of tube assembly, as shown.
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-4. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Rear (M101A3, M116A2E1, and M116A3)
1.
2.
3.
G-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-5. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left and Right (M101A2, M116A2, and M116A2E1)
Part Number
Position
11686103-1
Left Side (As Shown)
11686103-2
Right Side (Opposite of Shown)
1.
2.
Cut to proper length and bend as shown.
3.
G-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-6. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Left (M101A3 and M1 16A3)
1.
2.
3.
G-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-7. Hydraulic Brake Tube Assembly, Right (M101A3 and M116A3)
1.
2.
3.
G-8
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Figure G-8. Drawbar Clamp Spacer (M101A2 and M116A2)
1.
Fabricate from tube, part number WWP441 Class A, NSN 4710-00-162-1018.
2.
Cut to length as shown. Remove burrs.
Figure G-9. Adjustable Front Support Leg Chain
1.
Fabricate from weldless chain, part number RRC271.
2.
Cut to approximately 8 inches in length (12 links), as shown, to create part number RRC271-8.
G-9/(G-10 blank)
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX H
TORQUE VALUES FOR THREADED FASTENERS
Paragraph
Number
H-1
H-2
H-3
H-4
H-5
H-6
H-1.
Paragraph Title
Page
Number
General ..................................................................................................................... H-1

Torque Limits.............................................................................................................. H-1
How To Use Torque Table ............................................................................................ H-1
Tightening Metal Fasteners ........................................................................................... H-3
Fastener Size and Thread Pattern .................................................................................. H-4
Fastener Grade ........................................................................................................... H-5
GENERAL.
This section provides general torque limits for screws used on the M101 and Ml 16 Series trailer. Special torque limits
are indicated in the maintenance procedures for applicable components. The general torque limits given in this
appendix shall be used when specific torque limits are not indicated in the maintenance procedure. These general
torque limits cannot be applied to screws that retain rubber components. The rubber components will be damaged
before the correct torque limit is reached. If a special torque limit is not given in the maintenance instructions, tighten
the screw or nut until it touches the metal bracket, then tighten it one more turn.
H-2.
TORQUE LIMITS .
Table H-1 lists dry torque limits. Dry torque limits are used on screws that do not have lubricants applied to threads.
Table H-2 lists wet torque limits. Wet torque limits are used on screws that have high-pressure lubricants applied to
threads.
H-3.
HOW TO USE TORQUE TABLE.
1.
Measure the diameter of the screw to be

installed.
2.
Count the number of threads per inch or use a

pitch gage.
3.
Under the heading SIZE, look down the lefthand column until the diameter of screw to be
installed is found (there will usually be two lines
beginning with the same size).
4.
In the second column under SIZE, find the

number of threads per inch that matches the
number of threads counted in step 2.
H-1
H-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
H-3.
HOW TO USE TORQUE TABLE (continued).
5.
To find the grade of the screw that is to be installed, match the markings on the head to the correct picture of
CAPSCREW HEAD MARKINGS
CAPSCREW HEAD MARKINGS on the table.
Manufacturers marks may vary.
These are all SAE Grade No. 5 (3 lines).
6.
Look down the column under the picture found in step 5 until the torque limit in foot-pounds for the diameter
and threads per inch of the screw being installed is found.
Table H-1. Torque Limits for Dry Fasteners

SAE CAPSCREW HEAD
MARKINGS
H-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
H-3.
HOW TO USE TORQUE TABLE (continued).
Table H-2. Torque Limits for Wet Fasteners

SAE CAPSCREW HEAD
MARKINGS
H-4.
TIGHTENING METAL FASTENERS.
When torquing a fastener, select a torque wrench whose range (Table H-3) fits the required torque value. A torque
wrench is most accurate from 25 percent to 75 percent of its stated range. A torque wrench with a stated range of 0 to
100 will be most accurate from 25 to 75 foot-pounds. The accuracy of readings will decrease as you approach 0 footpounds or 100 foot-pounds. The ranges in Table H-3 are based on this principle.
H-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
H-4.
TIGHTENING METAL FASTENERS (continued).
Table H-3. Torque Ranges

STATED RANGE
0-600 ft-lb
0-170 ft-lb
15-75 ft-lb
H-5.
MOST EFFECTIVE RANGE

150-450 ft-lb
44-131 ft-lb
30-60 ft-lb
FASTENER SIZE AND THREAD PATTERN.
Threaded fasteners are categorized according to diameter of the fastener shank. Thread styles are divided into broad
groups, the two most common being coarse (Unified Coarse-UNC) and fine (Unified Fine-UNF). These groups are
defined by the number of threads per Inch on the bolt shanks. In addition, threads are categorized by thread class
(Table H-4), which is a measure of the degree between threads of bolt or screw (external threads) and threads of the
attaching nut or tapped hole (internal threads of the attaching nut or tapped hole) (internal threads). The most common
thread class for bolts and screws is Class 2.
EXTERNAL
1A
2A
3A
Table H-4. Thread Classes and Description

INTERNAL
1B
2B
3B
H-4
INTERNAL
LOOSE FIT
MEDIUM FIT
CLOSE FIT
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
H-6.
FASTENER GRADE.
In addition to being classified by thread type, thread fasteners are also classified by material.
fastener classification system is the SAE grading system (Table H-5).
Table H-5. SAE Screw and Bolt Markings

SCREWS
SAE GRADE 2
NO MARKING
BOLTS
SAE GRADE 6
4 RADIAL DASHES
0
90 APART
SAE GRADE 3
2 RADIAL DASHES
0
180 APART
SAE GRADE 7
5 RADIAL DASHES
0
72 APART
SAE GRADE 5
3 RADIAL DASHES
0
120 APART
SAE GRADE 8
6 RADIAL DASHES
0
60 APART
Markings on Hex Locknuts
GRADE A - No Marks
GRADE B - 3 Marks
GRADE C - 6 Marks
GRADE A - No Marks
GRADE B - Letter B
GRADE C - Letter C
GRADE A - No Notches
GRADE B - 1 Notch
GRADE C - 2 Notches
H-5/(H-6 blank)
The most familiar
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
APPENDIX I
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
Paragraph
Number
I-1
I-2
I-3
I-1.
Page
Number
Paragraph Title
General ..................................................................................................................... I-1

Specific Lubrication Instructions ...................................................................................... I-1
Lubrication Chart ......................................................................................................... I-2
GENERAL.
NOTE
These Instructions are MANDATORY.
a.
The M101 and Ml16 Series trailers must receive lubrication with approved lubricants at recommended intervals
in order to be mission-ready at all times.
b.
The KEY (p. 1-4) lists lubricants to be used in all temperature ranges and shows the intervals.
c.
The Lubncation Chart (p. 1-3) shows lubrication points, items to be lubricated, required lubricants, and
recommended intervals for lubrication. Any special lubricating instructions for specific components are
contained in NOTES (p. 1-4).
d.
Recommended intervals are based on normal conditions of operation; under extreme conditions,
should always be changed more frequently. When in doubt, notify your supervisor.
I-2.
SPECIFIC LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS .
a.
Keep all lubricants in a closed container and store in a clean, dry place away from extreme heat. Keep
container covers clean and do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign material to mix with lubricants. Keep all
lubrication equipment clean and ready for use.
b.
Maintain a record of lubrication performed and report any problems noted during lubrication. Refer to DA Pam
738-750 for maintenance forms and procedures for recording and reporting any findings.
lubricants
WARNING
Wipe excess lubricant from the area of brakeshoe linings to prevent grease from
soaking the linings. If brakeshoe linings become soaked, have Unit maintenance
replace them. Failure to follow this warning may cause brakes to malfunction,
resulting in serious injury or death to personnel.
c.
Keep all external parts not requiring lubrication free of lubricants.

grease to prevent accumulation of foreign matter.
After lubrication,
d.
After parts are cleaned, rinse and dry them thoroughly. Apply a light grade of oil to all polished metal surfaces
to prevent rusting.
I-1
wipe off excess oil or
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
I-2.
SPECIFIC LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS (continued).
e.
When authorized to install new parts, remove any preservative materials, such as rust preventive compound or
protective grease, prior to installation. Apply lubricant prescribed in lubrication Instructions if required.
f.
Clean and lubricate bearings as specified in TM 9-214.
g.
Refer to FM 9-207 for lubrication instructions in cold weather.
h.
After operation in mud or in sandy or dusty conditions, clean and inspect all points of lubrication for fouled
lubricants. Change lubricants as required.
i.
After any fording operation, lubricate vehicle in accordance with lubrication instructions.
WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic and flammable. Always wear protective
goggles and gloves, and use only in a well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with
skin, eyes, and clothes, and DO NOT breathe vapors. DO NOT use near open
j.
Clean all fittings and the area around lubrication points with drycleaning solvent (Item 14, Appendix F) or the
equivalent before lubricating equipment. After lubrication, wipe off excess oil or grease to prevent
accumulation of foreign matter.
I-3.
LUBRICATION CHART.
a.
The Lubrication Chart covers lubrication points for the Ml01 A2 and Ml01 A3 two-wheel, 3/4-ton cargo trailers;
the M116A2 and Ml 16A2E1 two-wheel, 3/4-ton chassis trailers; and the Ml 16A3 two-wheel, 1-ton chassis
trailer. The lubrication points shown are for all models unless otherwise noted.
b.
Intervals (on-condition or hard time) and related man-hour times are based on normal operation. The man
hour time specified is the time you need to do all the services prescribed for a particular interval. Decrease the
intervals if your lubricants are contaminated or if you are operating equipment under adverse conditions,
including longer than usual operating hours. The intervals may be extended during periods of low activity. If
extended, adequate preservation precautions must be taken.
c.
The lowest level of maintenance authorized to lubricate a point is indicated In parentheses by use of the
following: (C) Operator/Crew or (O) Unit maintenance.
I-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
I-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
NOTES:
WARNING
Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is toxic
Always wear
and flammable.
protective goggles and gloves, and
use only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and
and DO NOT breathe
clothes,
DO NOT use near open
vapors.
1. For prolonged operation of equipment in extreme
cold (temperatures below -10F [23 C]), remove
lubricants prescribed in the KEY for temperatures
above -10F (-230C). Clean parts with drycleaning
solvent (Item 14, Appendix F). Lubricate with
lubricants specified in the KEY for temperatures of
0F to -65F (18"C to -54-(). If OEA lubricant is
required to meet the temperature changes
prescribed in the KEY, OEA lubricant is to be used
in place of OE/HDO-10 lubricant for all temperature
ranges where OE/HDO-10 lubricant is specified in
the key.
2. Oil Can Points: Semiannually or as required,

lubricate the following with OE/HDO: handbrake
levers and linkage, adjustable front support leg
pivot points and handcrank, rear stabilizer pivot
points and latches, cargo body tailgate hinges and
latches, and rack and tailgate assembly hinges and
latches.
3. Adjustable Front Support Leg: Annually remove,
clean, inspect, pack with GAA, and install (para
4-51).
4. Master Cylinder: Semiannually fill to within 1/4 inch
(6.35 mm ) of top with BFS.
5. Wheel Bearings: Annually remove, clean, inspect,
pack with GAA, and Install (para 4-43). Refer to
TM 9-214.
6. Springs: Do not lubricate.
I-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
I-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
I-6
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
INDEX
Subject
Page
A
Abbreviations
..................................................................................................................................................1-2
Acronyms
..................................................................................................................................................1-2
Actuator Assembly, Hydraulic Brake ..........................................................................................................................4-63
Additional Authorization List ........................................................................................................................................ D-1
Adjustable Front Support Leg...................................................................................................................................4-101
Administrative Storage
Care of Equipment in...................................................................................................................................4-124
Definition of ..............................................................................................................................................4-122
Preparation of Equipment for ......................................................................................................................4-123
Procedures for Common Components .......................................................................................................4-125
Removal of Equipment from........................................................................................................................4-126
Army Materiel, Destruction of, To Prevent Enemy Use................................................................................................1-1
Axle
..................................................................................................................................................5-1
B
Basic Issue Items
................................................................................................................................................. C-1
Bearings
Cleaning
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Wheel
................................................................................................................................................4-83
Bleeding Hydraulic Brake System ..............................................................................................................................4-81
Body, Cargo
..............................................................................................................................................4-110
Brakedrum
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................4-83
Repair
..................................................................................................................................................5-3
Brake, Hydraulic Actuator Assembly
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................4-60
Bleeding
................................................................................................................................................4-81
Lines
................................................................................................................................................4-76
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................4-55
Principles of Operation ..................................................................................................................................1-17
Replacement ................................................................................................................................................4-63
Brake Line, Hydraulic
General Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................4-38
Replacement ................................................................................................................................................4-76
Bulletins
................................................................................................................................................. A-2
C
Cable
Electrical, Cleaning........................................................................................................................................4-36
Intervehicular ................................................................................................................................................4-46
Index-1
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
C (continued)
Canvas Cover Assembly (M101A2 and M101A3)

Grommet and Rope.....................................................................................................................................4-116
Installation
................................................................................................................................................2-11
Removal
................................................................................................................................................2-23
Repair
..................................................................................................................................................5-7
Care of Equipment in Administrative Storage ..........................................................................................................4-124
Cargo Body (M101A2 and M101A3) ........................................................................................................................4-110
Castings, Cleaning
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Cautions
...................................................................................................................................................vvi
Chains, Safety
..............................................................................................................................................4-103
Chassis Wiring Harness ............................................................................................................................................4-43
Cleaning Instructions
Bearings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Castings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Cables............................................................................................................................................4-36
Flexible Hoses...............................................................................................................................................4-36
Forgings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
General
................................................................................................................................................4-35
Machined Parts 4-36 .....................................................................................................................................4-36
Oil Seals .
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Steam Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................4-35
Cold, Operation in Extreme ........................................................................................................................................2-26
Common Tools and Equipment.......................................................................................................................4-1
Components
Common, Procedures for Storage of ..........................................................................................................4-125
Major, Location and Description .....................................................................................................................1-5
Of End Item ................................................................................................................................................. C-1
Composite Stoplight-Taillight .....................................................................................................................................4-39
Controls and Indicators ................................................................................................................................................2-1
Corrosion Prevention and Control . ............................................................................................................................ 1-3
Coupling Trailer to Towing Vehicle .......................................................................................................................... 2-16
Cover Assembly, Canvas (M101A2 and M101A3)
Grommet and Rope.....................................................................................................................................4-116
Installation
................................................................................................................................................2-11
Removal
................................................................................................................................................2-23
Repair
..................................................................................................................................................5-7
Cylinder, Master
................................................................................................................................................4-73
Cylinder, Wheel
................................................................................................................................................4-61
D
Data, Equipment
Data Plates
Contents
Location
Replacement
................................................................................................................................................1-14
................................................................................................................................................1-10
................................................................................................................................................1-10
..............................................................................................................................................4-118
Index-2
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
D (continued)
Destruction of Army Materiel To Prevent Enemy Use..................................................................................................1-1

Diagram, Wiring
................................................................................................................................................4-48
Differences Between Models......................................................................................................................................1-12
Direct Support and General Support Maintenance
Axle Maintenance............................................................................................................................................5-1
Brakedrum and Tire Maintenance ...................................................................................................................5-3
Drawbar Replacement................................................................................................................................................4-99
Dusty Areas, Operation in ..........................................................................................................................................2-27
E
Electrical Cables, Cleaning.........................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Ground Points.............................................................................................................................................4-38
Electrical System Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................4-39
Electrical Troubleshooting
Operator/Crew.................................................................................................................................................3-2
Unit
..................................................................................................................................................4-7
Equipment
Administrative Storage, Preparation for ......................................................................................................4-122
Care of, in Administrative Storage...............................................................................................................4-124
Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features.....................................................................................................1-4
Common Tools and .........................................................................................................................................4-1
Data
................................................................................................................................................1-14
Removal of, from Administrative Storage....................................................................................................4-126
Shipment, Preparation for ...........................................................................................................................4-126
Support
..................................................................................................................................................4-1
Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic ...............................................................................................................4-1
Equipment Improvement Recommendations, Reporting .............................................................................................1-2
Expendable and Durable Items List .............................................................................................................................F-1
Eyebolt
................................................................................................................................................4-98
F
Fastener Grade
................................................................................................................................................. H-5
Fastener Size and Thread Pattern .............................................................................................................................. H-4
Field Manuals
................................................................................................................................................. A-1
Flexible Hoses, Cleaning............................................................................................................................................4-36
Fluid Disposal
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Fording
................................................................................................................................................2-28
Forgings, Cleaning
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Forms
................................................................................................................................................. A-1
Forms, Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Frame
..................................................................................................................................................5-6
Front Support Leg, Adjustable..................................................................................................................................4-101
Index-3
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
G
General Maintenance
Bearings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Castings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Cables............................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Ground Points................................................................................................................................4-38
Flexible Hoses ..............................................................................................................................................4-36
Fluid Disposal ...............................................................................................................................................4-38
Forgings
................................................................................................................................................4-36
General
................................................................................................................................................4-35
Hydraulic Brake Lines....................................................................................................................................4-38
Inspection Instructions...................................................................................................................................4-36
Machined Parts .............................................................................................................................................4-36
Oil Seals
................................................................................................................................................4-36
Painting
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Ports
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Preservation of Parts.....................................................................................................................................4-37
Steam Cleaning.............................................................................................................................................4-35
Tagging Parts ................................................................................................................................................4-37
Work Safety ................................................................................................................................................4-34
Grommet, Canvas Cover Assembly .........................................................................................................................4-116
Ground Points, Electrical............................................................................................................................................4-38
H
Halt/Parking, at
................................................................................................................................................2-28
Handbrake
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................4-54
Cable Replacement.......................................................................................................................................4-46
Lever
................................................................................................................................................4-49
Linkage
................................................................................................................................................4-49
Operating
................................................................................................................................................2-11
Handling, Safety, and Care ..........................................................................................................................................1-3
Hanger, Spring
................................................................................................................................................4-92
Harness, Chassis Wiring ............................................................................................................................................4-43
Heat, Operation in Extreme........................................................................................................................................2-26
Hoses, Flexible
................................................................................................................................................4-36
How To Use This Manual ............................................................................................................................................... vi
Hub -83
................................................................................................................................................4-83
Humidity, Operation in High........................................................................................................................................2-27
Hydraulic Brake Actuator Assembly
Bleeding
................................................................................................................................................4-81
Ports
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Replacement ................................................................................................................................................4-63
Hydraulic Brake System .............................................................................................................................................1-17
Index-4
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
Illustrated List of Manufactured Items ......................................................................................................................... G-1

Indexing
.................................................................................................................................................... vi
Indicators and Controls ................................................................................................................................................2-1
Inspection Instructions
Service upon Receipt ......................................................................................................................................4-2
Intervehicular Cable ................................................................................................................................................4-46
L
Leakage Definitions ..................................................................................................................................................2-5
Leg, Front Support, Adjustable.................................................................................................................................4-101
Lever, Handbrake
................................................................................................................................................4-49
Lift Shackle
................................................................................................................................................4-97
Loading
................................................................................................................................................2-15
Lubrication
Chart
..................................................................................................................................................1-2
Instructions ...........................................................................................................................................3-1, 1-1
M
M101A2 and M101A3
Canvas Cover Assembly Grommet and Rope ............................................................................................4-116
Canvas Cover Assembly Repair .....................................................................................................................5-7
Cargo Body 4-110
Rack and Tailgate Assembly
Installation...............................................................................................................................................2-12
Removal 2-23
Machined Parts, Cleaning ..........................................................................................................................................4-36
Maintenance
Forms
..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. B-1
Procedures, Direct Support and General Support ....................................................................................5-1
Procedures, Operator/Crew......................................................................................................................3-2
Records ..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Reports ..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Unit
..................................................................................................................................................4-1
Maintenance Allocation Chart...................................................................................................................................... B-1
Maintenance, General
Bearings ................................................................................................................................................4-36
Castings ................................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Cables .....................................................................................................................................4-36
Electrical Ground Points .........................................................................................................................4-38
Flexible Hoses .......................................................................................................................................4-36
Fluid Disposal ........................................................................................................................................4-38
Forgings ............................................................................................................................................... 4-36
Index-5
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
M (continued)
Hydraulic Brake Lines .............................................................................................................................4-38

Inspection Instructions ............................................................................................................................4-36
Machined Parts .......................................................................................................................................4-36
Oi1 Seals ................................................................................................................................................4-36
Painting ................................................................................................................................................4-38
Ports
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Preservation of Parts ..............................................................................................................................4-37
Steam Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................4-35
Tagging Parts..........................................................................................................................................4-37
Work Safety ............................................................................................................................................4-34
Major Components, Location and Description .............................................................................................................1-5
Manuals, Field
................................................................................................................................................. A-1
Manuals, Technical ................................................................................................................................................. A-2
Manual, This
How To Use ............................................................................................................................................... vi
Scope
..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Manufactured Items Part Number Index . ................................................................................................................... G-1
Manufacturing Instructions ......................................................................................................................................... G-3
Master Cylinder
................................................................................................................................................4-73
Materiel, Destruction of To Prevent Enemy Use ..........................................................................................................1-1
Metal Fasteners, Tightening........................................................................................................................................ H-3
Models, Differences Between.....................................................................................................................................1-12
Mud. Operation n
................................................................................................................................................2-27
N
Notes
....................................................................................................................................................vii
O
Oil Seals, Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................4-36

Operation
In Dusty Areas ........................................................................................................................................2-27
In Extreme Cold ......................................................................................................................................2-26
In Extreme Heat ......................................................................................................................................2-26
In High Humidity......................................................................................................................................2-27
In Mud
................................................................................................................................................2-27
In Saltwater Areas...................................................................................................................................2-27
In Sandy Areas .......................................................................................................................................2-27
In Snow ................................................................................................................................................2-27
Under Unusual Conditions ......................................................................................................................2-26
Under Usual Conditions ..........................................................................................................................2-11
Operator/Crew
Electrical Troubleshooting.........................................................................................................................3-2
Maintenance Instructions ..........................................................................................................................3-1
Index-6
TM 92330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
O (continued)
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)...........................................................................2-3

Quick Guide to Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................3-3
Troubleshooting Chart ..............................................................................................................................3-4
Operators Controls and Indicators...............................................................................................................................2-1
P
Painting
General Maintenance..............................................................................................................................4-38
Identification Marking ..............................................................................................................................4-38
Instructions............................................................................................................................................4-121
Pamphlets
................................................................................................................................................. A-2
Parking/At Halt
................................................................................................................................................2-28
Parts
Preservation............................................................................................................................................4-37
Repair
..................................................................................................................................................4-1
Tagging ................................................................................................................................................4-37
Plates, Data
Contents ................................................................................................................................................1-10
Location ................................................................................................................................................1-10
Replacement.........................................................................................................................................4-118
PMCS, Operator/Crew
General Procedures..................................................................................................................................2-4
Leakage Definitions ..................................................................................................................................2-5
Operator/Crew ..........................................................................................................................................2-6
Reporting Repairs .....................................................................................................................................2-3
Service Intervals .......................................................................................................................................2-3
Specific Procedures ..................................................................................................................................2-4
Table
..................................................................................................................................................4-5
PMCS, Unit
General Procedures..................................................................................................................................4-3
Reporting Repairs .....................................................................................................................................4-3
Service Intervals .......................................................................................................................................4-3
Specific Procedures ..................................................................................................................................4-4
Table
..................................................................................................................................................4-5
Ports
................................................................................................................................................4-38
Preservation of Parts ................................................................................................................................................4-37
Principles of Operation, Hydraulic Brake System.......................................................................................................1-17
Publications
A-3
Q
Quality Assurance
................................................................................................................................................11-2
Quick Guide to Troubleshooting
Operator/Crew.................................................................................................................................................3-3
Unit
..................................................................................................................................................4-9
Index-7
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
R
Rack and Tailgate Assembly (M101A2 and M101A3)

Installation
................................................................................................................................................2-12
Removal
................................................................................................................................................2-23
Rear Stabilizer
..............................................................................................................................................4-119
Records, Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................1-1
References
....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Reflector (M101A2 and M101A3).............................................................................................................................4-117
Removal of Equipment from Administrative Storage ...............................................................................................4-126
Repair Parts
.......................................................................................................................................... 4-1, E-1
Repair Parts and Special Tools List
Abbreviations in.............................................................................................................................................. E-8
Explanation of Columns in............................................................................................................................ E-2
How To Locate Repair Parts ........................................................................................................................ E-7
Repair Parts List............................................................................................................................................. E-1
Special Information......................................................................................................................................... E-7
Repairs, Reporting
...........................................................................................................................................2-3, 4-3
Reports, Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................1-1
Rocky Terrain, Operation in .......................................................................................................................................2-27
S
Safety, Care, and Handling ..........................................................................................................................................1-3
Safety Chains
..............................................................................................................................................4-103
Safety. Work
................................................................................................................................................4-34
Saltwater Areas, Operation n ....................................................................................................................................2-27
Sandy Areas, Operation in .........................................................................................................................................2-27
Service Brake
Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................4-60
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................4-55
Service Intervals
Operator/Crew PMCS .....................................................................................................................................2-3
Unit PMCS ..................................................................................................................................................4-3
Service upon Receipt
Inspection Instructions.....................................................................................................................................4-2
Servicing Instructions ......................................................................................................................................4-2
Shackle, Lift
................................................................................................................................................4-97
Shipment, Preparation of Equipment for ...........................................................................................................1-1, 4-126
Shock Absorbers
..............................................................................................................................................4-108
Snow, Operation n
................................................................................................................................................2-27
Special Tools, TMDE, and Support Equipment ...........................................................................................................4-1
Spring Assembly
..............................................................................................................................................4-104
Spring Hanger
................................................................................................................................................4-92
Stabilizer, Rear
..............................................................................................................................................4-119
Steam Cleaning
................................................................................................................................................4-35
Stenciling
..............................................................................................................................................4-121
Stoplight-Taillight, Composite.....................................................................................................................................4-39
Index-8
TM 92330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
S (continued)
Storage, Administrative
Care of Equipment in...................................................................................................................................4-124
Definition of ..............................................................................................................................................4-122
Preparation for.................................................................................................................................................1-1
Preparation of Equipment for ......................................................................................................................4-123
Procedures for Common Components .......................................................................................................4-125
Removal of Equipment from........................................................................................................................4-126
Support Equipment ..................................................................................................................................................4-1
Support Leg, Front, Adjustable.................................................................................................................................4-101
T
Table of Contents
...................................................................................................................................................... i
Tagging Parts
................................................................................................................................................4-37
Tailgate (M101A2 and M101A3)...............................................................................................................................4-113
Tailgate and Rack Assembly (M101A2 and M101A3)
Installation
................................................................................................................................................2-12
Removal
................................................................................................................................................2-23
Technical Manuals
..............................................................................................................................................A-1ATest, Measurement, and Diagnostic Equipment ..........................................................................................................4-1
Tire
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................4-91
Repair
..................................................................................................................................................5-5
Replacement ................................................................................................................................................4-90
Tool and Test Equipment Requirements..................................................................................................................... B-3
Tools
Common
....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Special
..................................................................................................................................................4-1
Torque Limits
................................................................................................................................................. H-1
Torque Values for Threaded Fasteners ...................................................................................................................... H-1
Towing Instructions ................................................................................................................................................2-19
Troubleshooting Chart
Operator/Crew.................................................................................................................................................3-4
Unit
................................................................................................................................................4-10
Troubleshooting, Electrical
Operator/Crew.................................................................................................................................................3-2
Unit
..................................................................................................................................................4-7
Troubleshooting, Quick Guide to
Operator/Crew.................................................................................................................................................3-3
Unit
..................................................................................................................................................4-9
Tube Maintenance
................................................................................................................................................4-91
U
U-Bolt Replacement (M101A2 and M101A3) ...........................................................................................................4-115
Uncoupling Trailer from Towing Vehicle.....................................................................................................................2-21
Index-9
TM 9-2330-202-14&P
Subject
Page
U (continued)
Unit Maintenance
PMCS
..................................................................................................................................................4-3
Troubleshooting Procedures ...........................................................................................................................4-7
Unusual Conditions, Operation Under
Fording
................................................................................................................................................2-28
In Dusty Areas...............................................................................................................................................2-27
In Extreme Cold.............................................................................................................................................2-26
In Extreme Heat ............................................................................................................................................2-26
In High Humidity ............................................................................................................................................2-27
In Mud
................................................................................................................................................2-27
In Saltwater Areas .........................................................................................................................................2-27
In Sandy Areas..............................................................................................................................................2-27
In Snow
................................................................................................................................................2-27
Usual Conditions, Operation Under............................................................................................................................2-11
W
Warnings
.................................................................................................................................................... vi
Warning Summary
..................................................................................................................................................... a
Warranty Information ..................................................................................................................................................1-3
Wheel
Bearings
................................................................................................................................................4-83
Cylinder
................................................................................................................................................4-61
Replacement ................................................................................................................................................4-90
Wiring Diagram
................................................................................................................................................4-48
Wiring Harness, Chassis ............................................................................................................................................4-43
Work Safety
................................................................................................................................................4-34
Index- 10
RECOMMENDED
CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS)

THENJOT
0 DOWN
DOPE
THE N
=ATH
ABOUT
IT ON ITI
THIS FORM,
THEN
..IOTDOWN
CAREFULLYTEIR
BAND
CAREFULLY
TEAR
I IT OUT, FOLD
DROP
17
fro IT IN THE MAIL.
IT AND DROP
4%4@
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TM X-XXXX-XXX-XX
BE EXACT. PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS
PAGE PARAFIGURE TABLE
NO
GRAPH
NO
NO
DATE SENT
PUBLICATION DATE
Date of TM
PUBLICATION
TITLE
Title of TM
IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND

WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
ne pkv@-namber
p1led' '@DpOWS-tohC Wranj.

whim ale drv(er it, we Ireelve 4, re&1n1nj
rinj
ins feq of P.#^a," oucle- -iv be.
PRINTED
NAME,
GRADEORTITLE,ANDTELEPHONE
NUMBER
DA 1 FORM
JUL 79 2028-2
PREVIOUS EDITIONS
ARE OBSOLETE.
Sj/p,
SIGNHERE:
P.S. - IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR

RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS
AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEDGUARTERS.
I
REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028.2
FILL
IN YOUR
------------------------------------------------------------
UNIT'S
ADDRESS
FOLD BACK
C0B 1st BN 2nd BDE
Fort
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DOD314
Hood, TX. 76544
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300
Commander
U.S. Army Tank-automotive
and Armaments Command
ATTN: AIVISTA-AC-NML
Rock Island, IL 61299-7630
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RECOMMENDED
CHANGESTO EQUIPMENTTECHNICALPUBLICATIONS
WITHTHIS PUBLICATION?
THENJOT
DOWN
DOPE
THE
IT
ABOUT
ONTHIS
FORM,
DATE SENT
PUBLICATION
NUMBER
TM 9-2330-384-14&P
PAGE
PARATABLE
FIGURE
NO
GRAPH
NO
NO
PUBLICATION
9 July
1990
I PUBLICATION TITLE
Operator's, Unit, DS, and
GS Maintenance Manual Including RPSTL for
Semitrailer, M1062 (NSN 2330-01-275-7475)

PRINTED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER
DA 1FORM
79
JUL
2028-2
DATE
PREVIOUS EDITIONS
ARE OBSOLETE.
SIGN HERE:

RECOMMENDATION
MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS
AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADGUARTERS.
REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028-2
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DEPARTMENT
FOLD BACK
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OF THE ARMY
DOD314
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
Commander
ATTN: AMSTA-AC-NML
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0
z
0
T
M
RECOMMENDED
CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS

WRONG
WITH THIS PUBLICATION?
FROM:(PRINTYOURUNIT'SCOMPLETEADDRESS)
THENJOT
DOWN
THE DOPE
IT ABOUT
ON
THISFORM,
DROPIT IN THEMAIL.
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TM 9-2330-384-14&P
PAGE
PARAFIGURE
TABLE
NO
GRAPH
NO
NO
PUBLICATION DATE
9 July 1990
PUBLICATION TITLE Operator's, Unit, DS, and


PRINTED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER
DA 1FORM
JUL 79 2028-2
DATESENT
PREVIOUS EDITIONS
ARE OBSOLETE.
SIGN HERE:

AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEDQUARTERS.
FOLD BACK
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DEPARTMENT
OF THE ARMY
DOD314
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
Commander
ATTN: AMSTA-AC-NML
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RECOMMENDED
CHANGESTO EQUIPMENT
TECHNICALPUBLICATIONS
WITH THIS PUBLICATION?
_
TEA THE DOPE

THEN... JOT
DOWN
ITANDABOUT
DROPIT
IT ON THIS FORM,
CAREFULLY
CAREFULLY TEAR
)I IT OUT, FOLD
UTDROP
IT AND
IT
IT IN THE MAIL.
PUBLICATION NUMBER
TM 9-2330-384-14&P
PAGE
PARAFIGURE
TABLE
NO
GRAPH
NO
NO
PUBLICATION DATE
9 July 1990
PUBLICATION TITLE Operator's, Unit, DS, and


PRINTED
NAME,GRADEORTITLE,ANDTELEPHONE
NUMBER
DA 1 FORM
JUL 79
2028-2
DATE SENT
PREVI0US EDITIONS
ARE OBSOLETE.
E:

AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEDQUARTERS.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DEPARTMENT
FOLD BACK
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
OF THE ARMY
T
M
0

DOD314
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
Commander
ATTN: AMSTA-AC-NML
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PIN: 053993-000

TM-9-2330-202-14-P ΤΡΕΙΛΕΡ M 101 A3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM-9-2330-202-14-P ΤΡΕΙΛΕΡ M 101 A3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM-9-2330-202-14-P ΤΡΕΙΛΕΡ M 101 A3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety precautions should be followed when working with brake components?

What safety precautions should be followed when working with brake components?

What are some warnings related to coupling and uncoupling a trailer?

What are some warnings related to coupling and uncoupling a trailer?

TM 9-2330-202-14&P

This publication supersedes TM 9-2330-202-14&P dated 7 October 1993.

DIRECT SUPPORT AND

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

REPAIR PARTS AND

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING

IMPROPER CLEANING AGENTS

TAILGATE (CARGO TRAILER)

12 May 1997, is changed as follows:

1. Remove old pages and insert new pages.

Approvedfor public release;distribution is unlimited

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

Administrative Assistant to the

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Equipment Description and Data..................................................................

Principles of Operation .................................................................................

Description and Use of Operators Controls and Indicators .........................

Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)......

Operation Under Usual Conditions...............................................................

Operation Under Unusual Conditions...........................................................

OPERATOR/CREW MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Operator/Crew Troubleshooting Procedures ...............................................

Repair Parts; Tools; Special Tools; Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic

Service upon Receipt....................................................................................

Unit Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) .......................

Unit Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................

General Maintenance Instructions................................................................

Electrical System Maintenance ....................................................................

VII. Brake System Maintenance..........................................................................

VIII. Wheels, Hubs, and Brakedrums Maintenance .............................................

Frame and Towing Attachments Maintenance .............................................

Springs and Shock Absorbers Maintenance ................................................

Body Maintenance .......................................................................................

XII. Accessory Items Maintenance .....................................................................

XIII. Special Purpose Kits Maintenance ..............................................................

XIV. Painting and Identification Marking ..............................................................

XV. Preparation for Storage and Shipment .........................................................

DIRECT SUPPORT AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE

Axle Maintenance .........................................................................................

Brakedrum and Tire Maintenance ................................................................

Frame Assembly Maintenance .....................................................................

Accessory Items Maintenance......................................................................

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

Tool and Test Equipment Requirements ......................................................

COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS ...........

ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

Additional Authorization List (AAL) ...............................................................

REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

Repair Parts List

REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY .............................................................................

WHEELS AND TRACKS

WHEEL ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................